1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2024 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <linux/lockdep.h> 22 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 23 #include <net/codel.h> 24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 25 #include <linux/unaligned.h> 26 27 /** 28 * DOC: Introduction 29 * 30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 33 * drivers. 34 */ 35 36 /** 37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 38 * 39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 44 * tasklet function. 45 * 46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 48 */ 49 50 /** 51 * DOC: Warning 52 * 53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 55 */ 56 57 /** 58 * DOC: Frame format 59 * 60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 63 * hardware. 64 * 65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 66 * 67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 69 * 70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 72 */ 73 74 /** 75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 76 * 77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 81 * 82 * mac80211 will flush the workqueue upon interface removal and during 83 * suspend. 84 * 85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 86 * 87 */ 88 89 /** 90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 91 * 92 * mac80211 uses an intermediate queueing implementation, designed to allow the 93 * driver to keep hardware queues short and to provide some fairness between 94 * different stations/interfaces. 95 * 96 * Drivers must provide the .wake_tx_queue driver operation by either 97 * linking it to ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() or implementing a custom 98 * handler. 99 * 100 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 101 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 102 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 103 * 104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 106 * 107 * The driver can't access the internal TX queues (iTXQs) directly. 108 * Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue 109 * driver op. 110 * Drivers implementing a custom .wake_tx_queue op can get them by calling 111 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Drivers using ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() will 112 * simply get the individual frames pushed via the .tx driver operation. 113 * 114 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 115 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 116 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 117 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 118 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 119 * 120 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 121 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 122 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 123 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 124 * .release_buffered_frames(). 125 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 126 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 127 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 128 */ 129 130 /** 131 * DOC: HW timestamping 132 * 133 * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps 134 * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks. 135 * 136 * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing 137 * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp 138 * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the 139 * ieee80211_rx_status struct. 140 * 141 * Similarly, to report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine 142 * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field 143 * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the 144 * ieee80211_tx_status struct. 145 */ 146 struct device; 147 148 /** 149 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 150 * 151 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 152 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 153 */ 154 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 155 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 156 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 157 }; 158 159 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 160 161 /** 162 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 163 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 164 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 165 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 166 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 167 */ 168 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 169 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 170 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 171 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 172 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 173 }; 174 175 /** 176 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 177 * 178 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 179 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 180 * 181 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 182 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 183 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 184 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 185 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 186 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 187 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 188 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 189 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 190 */ 191 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 192 u16 txop; 193 u16 cw_min; 194 u16 cw_max; 195 u8 aifs; 196 bool acm; 197 bool uapsd; 198 bool mu_edca; 199 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 200 }; 201 202 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 203 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 204 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 205 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 206 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 207 }; 208 209 /** 210 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 211 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 212 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 213 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 214 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 215 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 216 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_DEF: The min chandef changed 217 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_AP: The AP channel definition changed, so (wider 218 * bandwidth) OFDMA settings need to be changed 219 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_PUNCTURING: The punctured channel(s) bitmap 220 * was changed. 221 */ 222 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 223 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 224 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 225 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 226 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 227 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_DEF = BIT(4), 228 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_AP = BIT(5), 229 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_PUNCTURING = BIT(6), 230 }; 231 232 /** 233 * struct ieee80211_chan_req - A channel "request" 234 * @oper: channel definition to use for operation 235 * @ap: the channel definition of the AP, if any 236 * (otherwise the chan member is %NULL) 237 */ 238 struct ieee80211_chan_req { 239 struct cfg80211_chan_def oper; 240 struct cfg80211_chan_def ap; 241 }; 242 243 /** 244 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 245 * 246 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 247 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 248 * 249 * @def: the channel definition 250 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 251 * @ap: the channel definition the AP actually is operating as, 252 * for use with (wider bandwidth) OFDMA 253 * @radio_idx: index of the wiphy radio used used for this channel 254 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 255 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 256 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 257 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 258 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 259 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 260 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 261 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 262 */ 263 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 264 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 265 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 266 struct cfg80211_chan_def ap; 267 268 int radio_idx; 269 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 270 271 bool radar_enabled; 272 273 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 274 }; 275 276 /** 277 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 278 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 279 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 280 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 281 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 282 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 283 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 284 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 285 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 286 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 287 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 288 * for changes/removal.) 289 */ 290 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 291 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 292 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 293 }; 294 295 /** 296 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 297 * 298 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 299 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 300 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 301 * done. 302 * 303 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 304 * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching 305 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 306 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 307 */ 308 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 309 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 310 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf; 311 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 312 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 313 }; 314 315 /** 316 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 317 * 318 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed() 319 * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed. 320 * 321 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 322 * also implies a change in the AID. 323 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 324 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 325 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 326 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 327 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 328 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 329 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 330 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 331 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 332 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 333 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 334 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 335 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 336 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 337 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 338 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 339 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 340 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 341 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 342 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 343 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 344 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 345 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 346 * changed 347 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 348 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 349 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 350 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 351 * context had been assigned. 352 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 353 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 354 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 355 * keep alive) changed. 356 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 357 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 358 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 359 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 360 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 361 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 362 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed. 363 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 364 * status changed. 365 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS: MLD valid links status changed. 366 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_TTLM: negotiated TID to link mapping was changed 367 * @BSS_CHANGED_TPE: transmit power envelope changed 368 */ 369 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 370 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 371 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 372 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 373 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 374 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 375 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 376 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 377 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 378 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 379 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 380 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 381 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 382 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 383 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 384 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 385 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 386 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 387 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 388 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 389 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 390 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 391 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 392 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 393 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 394 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 395 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 396 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 397 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 398 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 399 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 400 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30, 401 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = BIT_ULL(31), 402 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS = BIT_ULL(33), 403 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_TTLM = BIT_ULL(34), 404 BSS_CHANGED_TPE = BIT_ULL(35), 405 406 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 407 }; 408 409 /* 410 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 411 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 412 * filtering will be disabled. 413 */ 414 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 415 416 /** 417 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 418 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 419 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 420 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 421 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 422 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 423 * once each time the timeout triggers. 424 */ 425 enum ieee80211_event_type { 426 RSSI_EVENT, 427 MLME_EVENT, 428 BAR_RX_EVENT, 429 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 430 }; 431 432 /** 433 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 434 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 435 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 436 */ 437 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 438 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 439 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 440 }; 441 442 /** 443 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 444 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 445 */ 446 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 447 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 448 }; 449 450 /** 451 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 452 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 453 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 454 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 455 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 456 */ 457 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 458 AUTH_EVENT, 459 ASSOC_EVENT, 460 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 461 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 462 }; 463 464 /** 465 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 466 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 467 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 468 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 469 */ 470 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 471 MLME_SUCCESS, 472 MLME_DENIED, 473 MLME_TIMEOUT, 474 }; 475 476 /** 477 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 478 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 479 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 480 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 481 */ 482 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 483 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 484 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 485 u16 reason; 486 }; 487 488 /** 489 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 490 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 491 * @tid: the tid 492 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 493 */ 494 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 495 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 496 u16 tid; 497 u16 ssn; 498 }; 499 500 /** 501 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 502 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 503 * @u.rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 504 * @u.mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 505 * @u.ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 506 * @u:union holding the fields above 507 */ 508 struct ieee80211_event { 509 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 510 union { 511 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 512 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 513 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 514 } u; 515 }; 516 517 /** 518 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 519 * 520 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 521 * 522 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 523 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 524 */ 525 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 526 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 527 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 528 }; 529 530 /** 531 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 532 * 533 * @lci: LCI subelement content 534 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 535 * @lci_len: LCI data length 536 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 537 */ 538 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 539 const u8 *lci; 540 const u8 *civicloc; 541 size_t lci_len; 542 size_t civicloc_len; 543 }; 544 545 /** 546 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from 547 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail. 548 * 549 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 550 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 551 */ 552 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery { 553 u32 min_interval; 554 u32 max_interval; 555 }; 556 557 #define IEEE80211_TPE_EIRP_ENTRIES_320MHZ 5 558 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_eirp { 559 bool valid; 560 s8 power[IEEE80211_TPE_EIRP_ENTRIES_320MHZ]; 561 u8 count; 562 }; 563 564 #define IEEE80211_TPE_PSD_ENTRIES_320MHZ 16 565 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_psd { 566 bool valid; 567 s8 power[IEEE80211_TPE_PSD_ENTRIES_320MHZ]; 568 u8 count, n; 569 }; 570 571 /** 572 * struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe - parsed transmit power envelope information 573 * @max_local: maximum local EIRP, one value for 20, 40, 80, 160, 320 MHz each 574 * (indexed by TX power category) 575 * @max_reg_client: maximum regulatory client EIRP, one value for 20, 40, 80, 576 * 160, 320 MHz each 577 * (indexed by TX power category) 578 * @psd_local: maximum local power spectral density, one value for each 20 MHz 579 * subchannel per bss_conf's chanreq.oper 580 * (indexed by TX power category) 581 * @psd_reg_client: maximum regulatory power spectral density, one value for 582 * each 20 MHz subchannel per bss_conf's chanreq.oper 583 * (indexed by TX power category) 584 */ 585 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe { 586 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_eirp max_local[2], max_reg_client[2]; 587 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_psd psd_local[2], psd_reg_client[2]; 588 }; 589 590 /** 591 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 592 * 593 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 594 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 595 * 596 * @vif: reference to owning VIF 597 * @bss: the cfg80211 bss descriptor. Valid only for a station, and only 598 * when associated. Note: This contains information which is not 599 * necessarily authenticated. For example, information coming from probe 600 * responses. 601 * @addr: (link) address used locally 602 * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO 603 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 604 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 605 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 606 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 607 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 608 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 609 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 610 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 611 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 612 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames 613 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT 614 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 615 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 616 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 617 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 618 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 619 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 620 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 621 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 622 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 623 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 624 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 625 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 626 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 627 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 628 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 629 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 630 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 631 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 632 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 633 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 634 * Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't 635 * know how to track beacons for all of the links for this. 636 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 637 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 638 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 639 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 640 * the current band. 641 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 642 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 643 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 644 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 645 * @chanreq: Channel request for this BSS -- the hardware might be 646 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 647 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 648 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 649 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 650 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 651 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 652 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 653 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 654 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 655 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 656 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 657 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 658 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 659 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 660 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 661 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 662 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 663 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 664 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 665 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 666 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 667 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 668 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 669 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 670 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 671 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 672 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 673 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 674 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 675 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 676 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 677 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 678 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 679 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 680 * station. 681 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 682 * responder functionality. 683 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 684 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 685 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 686 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 687 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 688 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 689 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 690 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 691 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 692 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are 693 * connected to (STA) 694 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 695 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 696 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration 697 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 698 * interval. 699 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed 700 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware. 701 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz 702 * @tpe: transmit power envelope information 703 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS. 704 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT 705 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. 706 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 707 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 708 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 709 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 710 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 711 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 712 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. 713 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change. 714 * @ht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HT LDPC capability. 715 * @vht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has VHT LDPC capability. 716 * @he_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HE LDPC capability. 717 * @vht_su_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 718 * beamformer 719 * @vht_su_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 720 * beamformee 721 * @vht_mu_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 722 * beamformer 723 * @vht_mu_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 724 * beamformee 725 * @he_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 726 * beamformer 727 * @he_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 728 * beamformee 729 * @he_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE MU 730 * beamformer 731 * @he_full_ul_mumimo: does this BSS support the reception (AP) or transmission 732 * (non-AP STA) of an HE TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU 733 * bandwidth 734 * @eht_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 735 * beamformer 736 * @eht_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 737 * beamformee 738 * @eht_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT MU 739 * beamformer 740 * @eht_80mhz_full_bw_ul_mumimo: in AP-mode, does this BSS support the 741 * reception of an EHT TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU 742 * bandwidth 743 * @bss_param_ch_cnt: in BSS-mode, the BSS params change count. This 744 * information is the latest known value. It can come from this link's 745 * beacon or from a beacon sent by another link. 746 * @bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id: in BSS-mode, the link_id to which the beacon 747 * that updated &bss_param_ch_cnt belongs. E.g. if link 1 doesn't hear 748 * its beacons, and link 2 sent a beacon with an RNR element that updated 749 * link 1's BSS params change count, then, link 1's 750 * bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id will be 2. That means that link 1 knows that 751 * link 2 was the link that updated its bss_param_ch_cnt value. 752 * In case link 1 hears its beacon again, bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id will 753 * be updated to 1, even if bss_param_ch_cnt didn't change. This allows 754 * the link to know that it heard the latest value from its own beacon 755 * (as opposed to hearing its value from another link's beacon). 756 */ 757 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 758 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 759 struct cfg80211_bss *bss; 760 761 const u8 *bssid; 762 unsigned int link_id; 763 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 764 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 765 bool uora_exists; 766 u8 uora_ocw_range; 767 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 768 bool he_support; 769 bool twt_requester; 770 bool twt_responder; 771 bool twt_protected; 772 bool twt_broadcast; 773 /* erp related data */ 774 bool use_cts_prot; 775 bool use_short_preamble; 776 bool use_short_slot; 777 bool enable_beacon; 778 u8 dtim_period; 779 u16 beacon_int; 780 u16 assoc_capability; 781 u64 sync_tsf; 782 u32 sync_device_ts; 783 u8 sync_dtim_count; 784 u32 basic_rates; 785 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 786 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 787 u16 ht_operation_mode; 788 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 789 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 790 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 791 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 792 struct ieee80211_chan_req chanreq; 793 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 794 bool qos; 795 bool hidden_ssid; 796 int txpower; 797 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 798 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 799 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 800 u16 max_idle_period; 801 bool protected_keep_alive; 802 bool ftm_responder; 803 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 804 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 805 bool nontransmitted; 806 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 807 u8 bssid_index; 808 u8 bssid_indicator; 809 bool ema_ap; 810 u8 profile_periodicity; 811 struct { 812 u32 params; 813 u16 nss_set; 814 } he_oper; 815 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 816 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 817 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery; 818 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval; 819 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate; 820 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type; 821 822 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe tpe; 823 824 u8 pwr_reduction; 825 bool eht_support; 826 827 bool csa_active; 828 829 bool mu_mimo_owner; 830 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 831 832 bool color_change_active; 833 u8 color_change_color; 834 835 bool ht_ldpc; 836 bool vht_ldpc; 837 bool he_ldpc; 838 bool vht_su_beamformer; 839 bool vht_su_beamformee; 840 bool vht_mu_beamformer; 841 bool vht_mu_beamformee; 842 bool he_su_beamformer; 843 bool he_su_beamformee; 844 bool he_mu_beamformer; 845 bool he_full_ul_mumimo; 846 bool eht_su_beamformer; 847 bool eht_su_beamformee; 848 bool eht_mu_beamformer; 849 bool eht_80mhz_full_bw_ul_mumimo; 850 u8 bss_param_ch_cnt; 851 u8 bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id; 852 }; 853 854 /** 855 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 856 * 857 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 858 * 859 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 860 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 861 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 862 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 863 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 864 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 865 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 866 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 867 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 868 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 869 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 870 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 871 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 872 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 873 * station 874 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 875 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 876 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 877 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 878 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 879 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 880 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 881 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 882 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 883 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 884 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 885 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 886 * hardware queue. 887 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 888 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 889 * is for the whole aggregation. 890 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 891 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 892 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 893 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 894 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 895 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 896 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 897 * off-channel operation. 898 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation 899 * (header conversion) 900 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 901 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 902 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 903 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 904 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 905 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 906 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 907 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 908 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 909 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 910 * queue gets full. 911 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 912 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 913 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 914 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 915 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 916 * should kick the MLME state machine. 917 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 918 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 919 * status to user space) 920 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 921 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 922 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 923 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 924 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 925 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 926 * handled properly by the device. 927 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 928 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 929 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 930 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 931 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 932 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 933 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 934 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 935 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 936 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 937 * PS-Poll responses. 938 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 939 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 940 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 941 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 942 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 943 * monitor injection). 944 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 945 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 946 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 947 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 948 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 949 * 950 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 951 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 952 */ 953 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 954 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 955 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 956 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 957 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 958 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 959 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 960 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 961 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 962 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 963 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 964 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 965 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 966 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 967 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 968 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14), 969 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 970 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 971 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 972 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 973 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 974 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 975 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 976 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 977 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 978 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 979 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 980 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 981 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 982 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 983 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 984 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 985 }; 986 987 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 988 989 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS 990 991 /** 992 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 993 * 994 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 995 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 996 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 997 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 998 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 999 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 1000 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 1001 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 1002 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 1003 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 1004 * it can be sent out. 1005 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that 1006 * has already been assigned to this frame. 1007 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered 1008 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent 1009 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values. 1010 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally 1011 * for sequence number assignment 1012 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_USE_RATE_MASK: Don't use rate mask for this frame 1013 * which is transmitted due to scanning or offchannel TX, not in normal 1014 * operation on the interface. 1015 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this 1016 * frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is 1017 * only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is 1018 * also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame 1019 * is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if 1020 * it's intended for an MLD. 1021 * 1022 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 1023 */ 1024 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 1025 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 1026 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 1027 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 1028 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 1029 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 1030 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 1031 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6), 1032 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7), 1033 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8), 1034 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX = BIT(9), 1035 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_USE_RATE_MASK = BIT(10), 1036 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK = 0xf0000000, 1037 }; 1038 1039 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED 0xf 1040 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC \ 1041 u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \ 1042 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK) 1043 1044 /** 1045 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status 1046 * 1047 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid 1048 * 1049 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags. 1050 */ 1051 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags { 1052 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0), 1053 }; 1054 1055 /* 1056 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 1057 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 1058 */ 1059 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 1060 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 1061 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 1062 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 1063 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 1064 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 1065 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 1066 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 1067 1068 /** 1069 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 1070 * Rate Control algorithm. 1071 * 1072 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 1073 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 1074 * 1075 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 1076 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 1077 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 1078 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 1079 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 1080 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 1081 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 1082 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 1083 * Greenfield mode. 1084 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 1085 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 1086 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 1087 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 1088 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 1089 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 1090 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 1091 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 1092 */ 1093 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 1094 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 1095 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 1096 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 1097 1098 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 1099 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 1100 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 1101 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 1102 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 1103 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 1104 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 1105 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 1106 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 1107 }; 1108 1109 1110 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 1111 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 1112 1113 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 1114 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 1115 1116 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 1117 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 1118 1119 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 1120 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 1121 1122 /** 1123 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 1124 * 1125 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 1126 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 1127 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 1128 * 1129 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 1130 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 1131 * 1132 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 1133 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 1134 * 1135 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 1136 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 1137 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 1138 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 1139 * information:: 1140 * 1141 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 1142 * 1143 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 1144 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 1145 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 1146 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 1147 * information should then contain:: 1148 * 1149 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 1150 * 1151 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 1152 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 1153 */ 1154 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 1155 s8 idx; 1156 u16 count:5, 1157 flags:11; 1158 } __packed; 1159 1160 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 1161 1162 static inline bool ieee80211_rate_valid(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1163 { 1164 return rate->idx >= 0 && rate->count > 0; 1165 } 1166 1167 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 1168 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 1169 { 1170 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 1171 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 1172 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 1173 } 1174 1175 static inline u8 1176 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1177 { 1178 return rate->idx & 0xF; 1179 } 1180 1181 static inline u8 1182 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1183 { 1184 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 1185 } 1186 1187 /** 1188 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 1189 * 1190 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 1191 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 1192 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 1193 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 1194 * 1195 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 1196 * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races), 1197 * not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which 1198 * link the frame will be transmitted on 1199 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 1200 * @status_data: internal data for TX status handling, assigned privately, 1201 * see also &enum ieee80211_status_data for the internal documentation 1202 * @status_data_idr: indicates status data is IDR allocated ID for ack frame 1203 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 1204 * @control: union part for control data 1205 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 1206 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 1207 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 1208 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 1209 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 1210 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 1211 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 1212 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 1213 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 1214 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 1215 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 1216 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 1217 * @pad: padding 1218 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 1219 * @status: union part for status data 1220 * @status.rates: attempted rates 1221 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 1222 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 1223 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 1224 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 1225 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only 1226 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness 1227 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags 1228 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 1229 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 1230 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1231 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1232 */ 1233 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1234 /* common information */ 1235 u32 flags; 1236 u32 band:3, 1237 status_data_idr:1, 1238 status_data:13, 1239 hw_queue:4, 1240 tx_time_est:10; 1241 /* 1 free bit */ 1242 1243 union { 1244 struct { 1245 union { 1246 /* rate control */ 1247 struct { 1248 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1249 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1250 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1251 u8 use_rts:1; 1252 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1253 u8 short_preamble:1; 1254 u8 skip_table:1; 1255 1256 /* for injection only (bitmap) */ 1257 u8 antennas:2; 1258 1259 /* 14 bits free */ 1260 }; 1261 /* only needed before rate control */ 1262 unsigned long jiffies; 1263 }; 1264 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1265 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1266 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1267 u32 flags; 1268 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1269 } control; 1270 struct { 1271 u64 cookie; 1272 } ack; 1273 struct { 1274 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1275 s32 ack_signal; 1276 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1277 u8 ampdu_len; 1278 u8 antenna; 1279 u8 pad; 1280 u16 tx_time; 1281 u8 flags; 1282 u8 pad2; 1283 void *status_driver_data[16 / sizeof(void *)]; 1284 } status; 1285 struct { 1286 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1287 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1288 u8 pad[4]; 1289 1290 void *rate_driver_data[ 1291 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1292 }; 1293 void *driver_data[ 1294 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1295 }; 1296 }; 1297 1298 static inline u16 1299 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1300 { 1301 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1302 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1303 */ 1304 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1305 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1306 } 1307 1308 static inline u16 1309 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1310 { 1311 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1312 } 1313 1314 /*** 1315 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path 1316 * 1317 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a 1318 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet. 1319 * 1320 * @rate_idx The actual used rate. 1321 * @try_count How often the rate was tried. 1322 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the 1323 * corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level 1324 * that was used when sending the packet. 1325 */ 1326 struct ieee80211_rate_status { 1327 struct rate_info rate_idx; 1328 u8 try_count; 1329 u8 tx_power_idx; 1330 }; 1331 1332 /** 1333 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1334 * 1335 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1336 * @info: Basic tx status information 1337 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1338 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet 1339 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates) 1340 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver 1341 * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds 1342 * Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action 1343 * frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1344 */ 1345 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1346 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1347 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1348 struct sk_buff *skb; 1349 struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates; 1350 ktime_t ack_hwtstamp; 1351 u8 n_rates; 1352 1353 struct list_head *free_list; 1354 }; 1355 1356 /** 1357 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1358 * 1359 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1360 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1361 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1362 * 1363 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1364 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1365 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1366 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1367 */ 1368 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1369 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1370 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1371 const u8 *common_ies; 1372 size_t common_ie_len; 1373 }; 1374 1375 1376 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1377 { 1378 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1379 } 1380 1381 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1382 { 1383 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1384 } 1385 1386 /** 1387 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1388 * 1389 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1390 * 1391 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1392 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1393 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1394 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1395 * 1396 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the 1397 * driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore 1398 * any fields it needs after calling this helper. 1399 */ 1400 static inline void 1401 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1402 { 1403 int i; 1404 1405 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1406 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1407 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1408 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1409 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1410 /* clear the rate counts */ 1411 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1412 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1413 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates); 1414 } 1415 1416 1417 /** 1418 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1419 * 1420 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1421 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1422 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1423 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1424 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1425 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1426 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1427 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1428 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1429 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1430 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1431 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1432 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1433 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1434 * de-duplication by itself. 1435 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1436 * the frame. 1437 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1438 * the frame. 1439 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1440 * field) is valid if this field is non-zero, and the position 1441 * where the timestamp was sampled depends on the value. 1442 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1443 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1444 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1445 * merging. 1446 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1447 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1448 * (including FCS) was received. 1449 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1450 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1451 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_IS_RTAP_TS64: The timestamp passed in the RX status @mactime 1452 * is only for use in the radiotap timestamp header, not otherwise a valid 1453 * @mactime value. Note this is a separate flag so that we continue to see 1454 * %RX_FLAG_MACTIME as unset. Also note that in this case the timestamp is 1455 * reported to be 64 bits wide, not just 32. 1456 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1457 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1458 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1459 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1460 * each A-MPDU 1461 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1462 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1463 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1464 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1465 * on this subframe 1466 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1467 * done by the hardware 1468 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1469 * processing it in any regular way. 1470 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1471 * them for sniffing purposes. 1472 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1473 * monitor interfaces. 1474 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1475 * them for sniffing purposes. 1476 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1477 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1478 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1479 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1480 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1481 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1482 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1483 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1484 * interleaved with other frames. 1485 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END: This frame contains radiotap TLVs in the 1486 * skb->data (before the 802.11 header). 1487 * If used, the SKB's mac_header pointer must be set to point 1488 * to the 802.11 header after the TLVs, and any padding added after TLV 1489 * data to align to 4 must be cleared by the driver putting the TLVs 1490 * in the skb. 1491 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1492 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1493 * the first subframe. 1494 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1495 * be done in the hardware. 1496 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1497 * frame 1498 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1499 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1500 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1501 * 1502 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1503 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1504 * - DATA3_CODING 1505 * - DATA5_GI 1506 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1507 * - DATA6_NSTS 1508 * - DATA3_STBC 1509 * 1510 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1511 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1512 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1513 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1514 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1515 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1516 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1517 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1518 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by 1519 * hardware or driver) 1520 */ 1521 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1522 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1523 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1524 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(2), 1525 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1526 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1527 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1528 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1529 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_IS_RTAP_TS64 = BIT(7), 1530 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1531 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1532 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1533 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1534 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1535 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1536 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1537 /* one free bit at 15 */ 1538 RX_FLAG_MACTIME = BIT(16) | BIT(17), 1539 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = 1 << 16, 1540 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = 2 << 16, 1541 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = 3 << 16, 1542 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1543 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1544 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END = BIT(20), 1545 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1546 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1547 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1548 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1549 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1550 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1551 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1552 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1553 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1554 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30), 1555 }; 1556 1557 /** 1558 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1559 * 1560 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1561 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1562 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1563 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1564 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1565 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1566 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1567 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1568 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1569 */ 1570 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1571 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1572 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1573 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1574 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1575 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1576 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1577 }; 1578 1579 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1580 1581 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1582 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1583 RX_ENC_HT, 1584 RX_ENC_VHT, 1585 RX_ENC_HE, 1586 RX_ENC_EHT, 1587 }; 1588 1589 /** 1590 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1591 * 1592 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1593 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1594 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1595 * 1596 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1597 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1598 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1599 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1600 * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only 1601 * needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames. 1602 * Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1603 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1604 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1605 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1606 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1607 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1608 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1609 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz. 1610 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1611 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1612 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1613 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1614 * values were filled. 1615 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1616 * support dB or unspecified units) 1617 * @antenna: antenna used 1618 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1619 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1620 * @nss: number of streams (VHT, HE and EHT only) 1621 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1622 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1623 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1624 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1625 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1626 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1627 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1628 * @eht: EHT specific rate information 1629 * @eht.ru: EHT RU, from &enum nl80211_eht_ru_alloc 1630 * @eht.gi: EHT GI, from &enum nl80211_eht_gi 1631 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1632 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1633 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1634 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1635 * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag 1636 * is set only when connection is MLO. 1637 * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with 1638 * @link_valid. 1639 */ 1640 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1641 u64 mactime; 1642 union { 1643 u64 boottime_ns; 1644 ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp; 1645 }; 1646 u32 device_timestamp; 1647 u32 ampdu_reference; 1648 u32 flag; 1649 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1; 1650 u8 enc_flags; 1651 u8 encoding:3, bw:4; 1652 union { 1653 struct { 1654 u8 he_ru:3; 1655 u8 he_gi:2; 1656 u8 he_dcm:1; 1657 }; 1658 struct { 1659 u8 ru:4; 1660 u8 gi:2; 1661 } eht; 1662 }; 1663 u8 rate_idx; 1664 u8 nss; 1665 u8 rx_flags; 1666 u8 band; 1667 u8 antenna; 1668 s8 signal; 1669 u8 chains; 1670 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1671 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1672 u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4; 1673 }; 1674 1675 static inline u32 1676 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status) 1677 { 1678 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) + 1679 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0); 1680 } 1681 1682 /** 1683 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1684 * 1685 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1686 * 1687 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1688 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1689 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1690 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1691 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1692 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1693 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1694 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1695 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1696 * for more. 1697 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1698 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1699 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1700 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1701 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1702 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1703 * operating channel. 1704 */ 1705 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1706 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1707 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1708 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1709 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1710 }; 1711 1712 1713 /** 1714 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1715 * 1716 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1717 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1718 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1719 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1720 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1721 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1722 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1723 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1724 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1725 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1726 */ 1727 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1728 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1729 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1730 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1731 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1732 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1733 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1734 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1735 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1736 }; 1737 1738 /** 1739 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1740 * 1741 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1742 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1743 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1744 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1745 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1746 */ 1747 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1748 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1749 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1750 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1751 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1752 1753 /* keep last */ 1754 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1755 }; 1756 1757 /** 1758 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1759 * 1760 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1761 * 1762 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1763 * 1764 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1765 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1766 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1767 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1768 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1769 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1770 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1771 * 1772 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1773 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1774 * 1775 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1776 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1777 * 1778 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1779 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1780 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1781 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1782 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1783 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1784 * 1785 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1786 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1787 * configured for an HT channel. 1788 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1789 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1790 */ 1791 struct ieee80211_conf { 1792 u32 flags; 1793 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1794 1795 u16 listen_interval; 1796 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1797 1798 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1799 1800 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1801 bool radar_enabled; 1802 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1803 }; 1804 1805 /** 1806 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1807 * 1808 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1809 * operation. 1810 * 1811 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1812 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1813 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1814 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1815 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1816 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1817 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1818 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1819 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1820 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1821 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1822 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1823 * channel, expressed in TU. 1824 * @link_id: the link ID of the link doing the channel switch, 0 for non-MLO 1825 */ 1826 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1827 u64 timestamp; 1828 u32 device_timestamp; 1829 bool block_tx; 1830 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1831 u8 count; 1832 u8 link_id; 1833 u32 delay; 1834 }; 1835 1836 /** 1837 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1838 * 1839 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1840 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1841 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1842 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1843 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1844 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1845 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1846 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1847 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1848 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1849 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1850 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1851 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1852 * @IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE: The driver indicates that EML operation is 1853 * enabled for the interface. 1854 * @IEEE80211_VIF_IGNORE_OFDMA_WIDER_BW: Ignore wider bandwidth OFDMA 1855 * operation on this interface and request a channel context without 1856 * the AP definition. Use this e.g. because the device is able to 1857 * handle OFDMA (downlink and trigger for uplink) on a per-AP basis. 1858 * @IEEE80211_VIF_REMOVE_AP_AFTER_DISASSOC: indicates that the AP sta should 1859 * be removed only after setting the vif as unassociated, and not the 1860 * opposite. Only relevant for STA vifs. 1861 */ 1862 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 1863 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 1864 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 1865 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 1866 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 1867 IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE = BIT(4), 1868 IEEE80211_VIF_IGNORE_OFDMA_WIDER_BW = BIT(5), 1869 IEEE80211_VIF_REMOVE_AP_AFTER_DISASSOC = BIT(6), 1870 }; 1871 1872 1873 /** 1874 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags 1875 * 1876 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled 1877 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211. 1878 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface. 1879 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload 1880 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled 1881 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to 1882 * mac80211. 1883 */ 1884 1885 enum ieee80211_offload_flags { 1886 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0), 1887 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1), 1888 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2), 1889 }; 1890 1891 /** 1892 * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration 1893 * @assoc: association status 1894 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not 1895 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 1896 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 1897 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 1898 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 1899 * @eml_cap: EML capabilities as described in P802.11be_D4.1 Figure 9-1001j. 1900 * @eml_med_sync_delay: Medium Synchronization delay as described in 1901 * P802.11be_D4.1 Figure 9-1001i. 1902 * @mld_capa_op: MLD Capabilities and Operations per P802.11be_D4.1 1903 * Figure 9-1001k 1904 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 1905 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 1906 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 1907 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 1908 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 1909 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 1910 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 1911 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 1912 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 1913 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format). 1914 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 1915 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 1916 * your driver/device needs to do. 1917 * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections 1918 * (station mode only) 1919 */ 1920 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg { 1921 /* association related data */ 1922 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 1923 bool ibss_creator; 1924 bool ps; 1925 u16 aid; 1926 u16 eml_cap; 1927 u16 eml_med_sync_delay; 1928 u16 mld_capa_op; 1929 1930 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 1931 int arp_addr_cnt; 1932 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 1933 size_t ssid_len; 1934 bool s1g; 1935 bool idle; 1936 u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1937 }; 1938 1939 #define IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS 8 1940 1941 /** 1942 * struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm - negotiated TID to link map info 1943 * 1944 * @downlink: bitmap of active links per TID for downlink, or 0 if mapping for 1945 * this TID is not included. 1946 * @uplink: bitmap of active links per TID for uplink, or 0 if mapping for this 1947 * TID is not included. 1948 * @valid: info is valid or not. 1949 */ 1950 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm { 1951 u16 downlink[IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS]; 1952 u16 uplink[IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS]; 1953 bool valid; 1954 }; 1955 1956 /** 1957 * enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res - return value for negotiated TTLM handling 1958 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_ACCEPT: accept the request 1959 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_REJECT: reject the request 1960 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_SUGGEST_PREFERRED: reject and suggest a new mapping 1961 */ 1962 enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res { 1963 NEG_TTLM_RES_ACCEPT, 1964 NEG_TTLM_RES_REJECT, 1965 NEG_TTLM_RES_SUGGEST_PREFERRED 1966 }; 1967 1968 /** 1969 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 1970 * 1971 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 1972 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 1973 * 1974 * @type: type of this virtual interface 1975 * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg 1976 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 1977 * or the BSS we're associated to 1978 * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration, 1979 * indexed by link ID 1980 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1981 * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1982 * The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the 1983 * API calls meant for that purpose. 1984 * @dormant_links: subset of the valid links that are disabled/suspended 1985 * due to advertised or negotiated TTLM respectively. 1986 * 0 for non-MLO. 1987 * @suspended_links: subset of dormant_links representing links that are 1988 * suspended due to negotiated TTLM, and could be activated in the 1989 * future by tearing down the TTLM negotiation. 1990 * 0 for non-MLO. 1991 * @neg_ttlm: negotiated TID to link mapping info. 1992 * see &struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm. 1993 * @addr: address of this interface 1994 * @addr_valid: indicates if the address is actively used. Set to false for 1995 * passive monitor interfaces, true in all other cases. 1996 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 1997 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 1998 * @netdev_features: tx netdev features supported by the hardware for this 1999 * vif. mac80211 initializes this to hw->netdev_features, and the driver 2000 * can mask out specific tx features. mac80211 will handle software fixup 2001 * for masked offloads (GSO, CSUM) 2002 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 2003 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 2004 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 2005 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 2006 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface. 2007 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface, 2008 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver 2009 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change 2010 * restrictions. 2011 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 2012 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 2013 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 2014 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 2015 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 2016 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 2017 * interface. 2018 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211 2019 * for this interface. 2020 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2021 * sizeof(void \*). 2022 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue 2023 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see 2024 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags. 2025 * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled. 2026 */ 2027 struct ieee80211_vif { 2028 enum nl80211_iftype type; 2029 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg; 2030 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 2031 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2032 u16 valid_links, active_links, dormant_links, suspended_links; 2033 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm neg_ttlm; 2034 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 2035 bool addr_valid; 2036 bool p2p; 2037 2038 u8 cab_queue; 2039 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 2040 2041 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 2042 2043 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2044 u32 driver_flags; 2045 u32 offload_flags; 2046 2047 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 2048 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 2049 #endif 2050 2051 bool probe_req_reg; 2052 bool rx_mcast_action_reg; 2053 2054 struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif; 2055 2056 /* must be last */ 2057 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2058 }; 2059 2060 /** 2061 * ieee80211_vif_usable_links - Return the usable links for the vif 2062 * @vif: the vif for which the usable links are requested 2063 * Return: the usable link bitmap 2064 */ 2065 static inline u16 ieee80211_vif_usable_links(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2066 { 2067 return vif->valid_links & ~vif->dormant_links; 2068 } 2069 2070 /** 2071 * ieee80211_vif_is_mld - Returns true iff the vif is an MLD one 2072 * @vif: the vif 2073 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD, %false otherwise. 2074 */ 2075 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mld(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2076 { 2077 /* valid_links != 0 indicates this vif is an MLD */ 2078 return vif->valid_links != 0; 2079 } 2080 2081 /** 2082 * ieee80211_vif_link_active - check if a given link is active 2083 * @vif: the vif 2084 * @link_id: the link ID to check 2085 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD and the link is active, or if 2086 * the vif is not an MLD and the link ID is 0; %false otherwise. 2087 */ 2088 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_link_active(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 2089 unsigned int link_id) 2090 { 2091 if (!ieee80211_vif_is_mld(vif)) 2092 return link_id == 0; 2093 return vif->active_links & BIT(link_id); 2094 } 2095 2096 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id) \ 2097 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++) \ 2098 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2099 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2100 (link = link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id))) 2101 2102 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2103 { 2104 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 2105 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 2106 #endif 2107 return false; 2108 } 2109 2110 /** 2111 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 2112 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 2113 * 2114 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 2115 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 2116 * 2117 * Return: pointer to the wdev, or %NULL if the given wdev isn't 2118 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 2119 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 2120 */ 2121 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 2122 2123 /** 2124 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 2125 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 2126 * 2127 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 2128 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 2129 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif. 2130 * 2131 * Return: pointer to the wdev 2132 */ 2133 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 2134 2135 static inline bool lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2136 { 2137 return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->wiphy->mtx); 2138 } 2139 2140 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id) \ 2141 rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 2142 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif)) 2143 2144 #define link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id) \ 2145 rcu_dereference_check((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 2146 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif)) 2147 2148 /** 2149 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 2150 * 2151 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 2152 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 2153 * 2154 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 2155 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 2156 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 2157 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 2158 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 2159 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 2160 * generation in software. 2161 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 2162 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 2163 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 2164 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 2165 * (MFP) to be done in software. 2166 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 2167 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 2168 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 2169 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 2170 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 2171 * MIC. 2172 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 2173 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 2174 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 2175 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 2176 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 2177 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 2178 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 2179 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 2180 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 2181 * only for management frames (MFP). 2182 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 2183 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 2184 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 2185 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 2186 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 2187 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 2188 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 2189 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 2190 * for a AES_CMAC or a AES_GMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence 2191 * number generation only 2192 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SPP_AMSDU: SPP A-MSDUs can be used with this key 2193 * (set by mac80211 from the sta->spp_amsdu flag) 2194 */ 2195 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 2196 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 2197 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 2198 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 2199 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 2200 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 2201 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 2202 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 2203 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 2204 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 2205 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 2206 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 2207 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SPP_AMSDU = BIT(11), 2208 }; 2209 2210 /** 2211 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 2212 * 2213 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 2214 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 2215 * 2216 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 2217 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 2218 * encrypted in hardware. 2219 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 2220 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 2221 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 2222 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 2223 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3) 2224 * @keylen: key material length 2225 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 2226 * data block: 2227 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 2228 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 2229 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 2230 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 2231 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 2232 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, or -1 for non-MLO or pairwise keys 2233 */ 2234 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 2235 atomic64_t tx_pn; 2236 u32 cipher; 2237 u8 icv_len; 2238 u8 iv_len; 2239 u8 hw_key_idx; 2240 s8 keyidx; 2241 u16 flags; 2242 s8 link_id; 2243 u8 keylen; 2244 u8 key[]; 2245 }; 2246 2247 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 2248 2249 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 2250 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 2251 2252 /** 2253 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 2254 * 2255 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 2256 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2257 * reverse order than in packet) 2258 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2259 * reverse order than in packet) 2260 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2261 * reverse order than in packet) 2262 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2263 * reverse order than in packet) 2264 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 2265 */ 2266 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 2267 union { 2268 struct { 2269 u32 iv32; 2270 u16 iv16; 2271 } tkip; 2272 struct { 2273 u8 pn[6]; 2274 } ccmp; 2275 struct { 2276 u8 pn[6]; 2277 } aes_cmac; 2278 struct { 2279 u8 pn[6]; 2280 } aes_gmac; 2281 struct { 2282 u8 pn[6]; 2283 } gcmp; 2284 struct { 2285 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 2286 u8 seq_len; 2287 } hw; 2288 }; 2289 }; 2290 2291 /** 2292 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 2293 * 2294 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2295 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 2296 * 2297 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 2298 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 2299 */ 2300 enum set_key_cmd { 2301 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 2302 }; 2303 2304 /** 2305 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 2306 * 2307 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 2308 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 2309 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 2310 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 2311 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 2312 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 2313 */ 2314 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 2315 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 2316 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 2317 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 2318 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 2319 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 2320 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 2321 }; 2322 2323 /** 2324 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 2325 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 2326 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 2327 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 2328 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 2329 * (including 80+80 MHz) 2330 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz 2331 * 2332 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 2333 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 2334 */ 2335 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 2336 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 2337 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 2338 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 2339 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 2340 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320, 2341 }; 2342 2343 /** 2344 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 2345 * 2346 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 2347 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 2348 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 2349 */ 2350 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 2351 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 2352 struct { 2353 s8 idx; 2354 u8 count; 2355 u8 count_cts; 2356 u8 count_rts; 2357 u16 flags; 2358 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 2359 }; 2360 2361 /** 2362 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 2363 * 2364 * Used to configure txpower for station. 2365 * 2366 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 2367 * to the STA. 2368 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 2369 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 2370 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 2371 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 2372 * per peer TPC. 2373 */ 2374 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 2375 s16 power; 2376 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 2377 }; 2378 2379 /** 2380 * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links 2381 * 2382 * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the 2383 * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change. 2384 * 2385 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2386 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2387 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2388 * 2389 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2390 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2391 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2392 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2393 * 2394 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2395 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2396 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2397 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 2398 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 2399 */ 2400 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates { 2401 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2402 2403 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2404 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2405 }; 2406 2407 /** 2408 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info 2409 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single) 2410 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here. 2411 * 2412 * @sta: reference to owning STA 2413 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr 2414 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different 2415 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr) 2416 * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink) 2417 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 2418 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates 2419 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2420 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2421 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 2422 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities 2423 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA 2424 * @agg: per-link data for multi-link aggregation 2425 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with 2426 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 2427 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 2428 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 2429 * the station moves to associated state. 2430 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 2431 * 2432 */ 2433 struct ieee80211_link_sta { 2434 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2435 2436 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2437 u8 link_id; 2438 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2439 2440 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 2441 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 2442 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2443 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2444 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa; 2445 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap; 2446 2447 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg; 2448 2449 u8 rx_nss; 2450 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2451 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2452 }; 2453 2454 /** 2455 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 2456 * 2457 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 2458 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 2459 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 2460 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 2461 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 2462 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 2463 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association 2464 * and holds pointers to various link STA's 2465 * 2466 * @addr: MAC address 2467 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 2468 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 2469 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 2470 * Can be modified by driver. 2471 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 2472 * otherwise always false) 2473 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2474 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 2475 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 2476 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 2477 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 2478 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 2479 * @rates: rate control selection table 2480 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 2481 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 2482 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 2483 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 2484 * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station. 2485 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 2486 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 2487 * unlimited. 2488 * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links 2489 * For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA 2490 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it. 2491 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 2492 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues; note that the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) 2493 * is used for non-data frames 2494 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link 2495 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through 2496 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA 2497 * the first added link STA will point to deflink. 2498 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link, 2499 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and 2500 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO 2501 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to 2502 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address 2503 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned 2504 * by the AP. 2505 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO 2506 * @spp_amsdu: indicates whether the STA uses SPP A-MSDU or not. 2507 */ 2508 struct ieee80211_sta { 2509 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 2510 u16 aid; 2511 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2512 bool wme; 2513 u8 uapsd_queues; 2514 u8 max_sp; 2515 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2516 bool tdls; 2517 bool tdls_initiator; 2518 bool mfp; 2519 bool mlo; 2520 bool spp_amsdu; 2521 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2522 2523 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur; 2524 2525 bool support_p2p_ps; 2526 2527 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2528 2529 u16 valid_links; 2530 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink; 2531 struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2532 2533 /* must be last */ 2534 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2535 }; 2536 2537 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP 2538 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 2539 #else 2540 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta) 2541 { 2542 return true; 2543 } 2544 #endif 2545 2546 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id) \ 2547 rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2548 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2549 2550 #define link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id) \ 2551 rcu_dereference_check((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2552 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2553 2554 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id) \ 2555 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++) \ 2556 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2557 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2558 ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id))) 2559 2560 /** 2561 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2562 * 2563 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2564 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2565 * 2566 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2567 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2568 */ 2569 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2570 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2571 }; 2572 2573 /** 2574 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2575 * 2576 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2577 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2578 */ 2579 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2580 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2581 }; 2582 2583 /** 2584 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2585 * 2586 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2587 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2588 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2589 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2590 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2591 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2592 * 2593 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2594 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2595 */ 2596 struct ieee80211_txq { 2597 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2598 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2599 u8 tid; 2600 u8 ac; 2601 2602 /* must be last */ 2603 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2604 }; 2605 2606 /** 2607 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2608 * 2609 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2610 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2611 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2612 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2613 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2614 * 2615 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2616 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2617 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2618 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2619 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2620 * algorithm. 2621 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2622 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2623 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2624 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2625 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2626 * CCK frames. 2627 * 2628 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2629 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2630 * the FCS at the end. 2631 * 2632 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2633 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2634 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2635 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2636 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2637 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2638 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2639 * 2640 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2641 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2642 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2643 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2644 * 2645 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2646 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2647 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2648 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2649 * 2650 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2651 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2652 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2653 * 2654 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2655 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2656 * 2657 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2658 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2659 * 2660 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2661 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2662 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2663 * 2664 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2665 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2666 * 2667 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2668 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2669 * 2670 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2671 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2672 * the stack. 2673 * 2674 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2675 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2676 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2677 * 2678 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2679 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2680 * dtim_period). 2681 * 2682 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2683 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2684 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2685 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2686 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2687 * only in that case. 2688 * 2689 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2690 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2691 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2692 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2693 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2694 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2695 * 2696 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2697 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2698 * software. 2699 * 2700 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2701 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2702 * active interfaces. 2703 * 2704 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_VIRTUAL_MONITOR: The driver would like to be informed 2705 * of any monitor interface, as well as their configured channel. 2706 * This is useful for supporting multiple monitor interfaces on different 2707 * channels. 2708 * 2709 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2710 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2711 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2712 * 2713 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2714 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2715 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2716 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2717 * supported cipher suites. 2718 * 2719 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2720 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2721 * for frames. 2722 * 2723 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2724 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2725 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2726 * control for more details. 2727 * 2728 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2729 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2730 * 2731 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2732 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2733 * is supported. 2734 * 2735 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2736 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2737 * 2738 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2739 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2740 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2741 * 2742 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2743 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2744 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2745 * CSA frame. 2746 * 2747 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2748 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2749 * 2750 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2751 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2752 * 2753 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2754 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2755 * 2756 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2757 * within A-MPDU. 2758 * 2759 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2760 * for sent beacons. 2761 * 2762 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2763 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2764 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2765 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2766 * 2767 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2768 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2769 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 2770 * timeout. 2771 * 2772 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 2773 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 2774 * 2775 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 2776 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 2777 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 2778 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 2779 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 2780 * 2781 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 2782 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 2783 * 2784 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 2785 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 2786 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 2787 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 2788 * 2789 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 2790 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 2791 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 2792 * 2793 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 2794 * TDLS links. 2795 * 2796 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 2797 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 2798 * 2799 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 2800 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 2801 * 2802 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 2803 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 2804 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 2805 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 2806 * See also the documentation for that flag. 2807 * 2808 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 2809 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 2810 * TXQs to start with. 2811 * 2812 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 2813 * length in tx status information 2814 * 2815 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2816 * 2817 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2818 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 2819 * 2820 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 2821 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 2822 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 2823 * 2824 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation 2825 * offload 2826 * 2827 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation 2828 * offload 2829 * 2830 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx 2831 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface. 2832 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real 2833 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to 2834 * the stack. 2835 * 2836 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color 2837 * collision detection and doesn't need it in software. 2838 * 2839 * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting 2840 * multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that. 2841 * 2842 * @IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING: HW requires disabling puncturing in EHT 2843 * and connecting with a lower bandwidth instead 2844 * @IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING_5GHZ: HW requires disabling puncturing in 2845 * EHT in 5 GHz and connecting with a lower bandwidth instead 2846 * 2847 * @IEEE80211_HW_HANDLES_QUIET_CSA: HW/driver handles quieting for CSA, so 2848 * no need to stop queues. This really should be set by a driver that 2849 * implements MLO, so operation can continue on other links when one 2850 * link is switching. 2851 * 2852 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 2853 */ 2854 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 2855 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 2856 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 2857 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 2858 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 2859 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 2860 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 2861 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 2862 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 2863 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 2864 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 2865 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 2866 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 2867 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 2868 IEEE80211_HW_NO_VIRTUAL_MONITOR, 2869 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 2870 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 2871 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 2872 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 2873 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 2874 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 2875 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 2876 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 2877 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 2878 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 2879 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 2880 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 2881 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 2882 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 2883 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 2884 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 2885 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 2886 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 2887 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 2888 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 2889 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 2890 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 2891 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 2892 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 2893 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 2894 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 2895 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 2896 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 2897 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 2898 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 2899 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 2900 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 2901 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 2902 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 2903 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 2904 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD, 2905 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD, 2906 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP, 2907 IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION, 2908 IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX, 2909 IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING, 2910 IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING_5GHZ, 2911 IEEE80211_HW_HANDLES_QUIET_CSA, 2912 2913 /* keep last, obviously */ 2914 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 2915 }; 2916 2917 /** 2918 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 2919 * 2920 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 2921 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 2922 * 2923 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 2924 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 2925 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 2926 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 2927 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 2928 * 2929 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 2930 * 2931 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 2932 * along with this structure. 2933 * 2934 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 2935 * 2936 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 2937 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 2938 * 2939 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 2940 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 2941 * 2942 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 2943 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 2944 * 2945 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 2946 * that HW supports 2947 * 2948 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 2949 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 2950 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 2951 * 2952 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 2953 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 2954 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 2955 * 2956 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2957 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 2958 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2959 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 2960 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2961 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 2962 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2963 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 2964 * 2965 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 2966 * can handle. 2967 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 2968 * the hw can report back. 2969 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 2970 * 2971 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 2972 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 2973 * aggregation. 2974 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 2975 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 2976 * it shouldn't be set. 2977 * 2978 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 2979 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 2980 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 2981 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 2982 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 2983 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 2984 * 2985 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 2986 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 2987 * 2988 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 2989 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 2990 * 2991 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 2992 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 2993 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 2994 * adding _BW is supported today. 2995 * 2996 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 2997 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 2998 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 2999 * 3000 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 3001 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 3002 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 3003 * device_timestamp. 3004 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 3005 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 3006 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 3007 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 3008 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 3009 * 3010 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 3011 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 3012 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 3013 * 3014 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 3015 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 3016 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 3017 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 3018 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 3019 * neither enabled. 3020 * 3021 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 3022 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 3023 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 3024 * 3025 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 3026 * device. 3027 * 3028 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 3029 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 3030 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 3031 * 3032 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 3033 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 3034 * 3035 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 3036 * 3037 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware. 3038 * The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions. 3039 * The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level. 3040 * 3041 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list. 3042 */ 3043 struct ieee80211_hw { 3044 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 3045 struct wiphy *wiphy; 3046 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 3047 void *priv; 3048 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 3049 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 3050 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 3051 int vif_data_size; 3052 int sta_data_size; 3053 int chanctx_data_size; 3054 int txq_data_size; 3055 u16 queues; 3056 u16 max_listen_interval; 3057 s8 max_signal; 3058 u8 max_rates; 3059 u8 max_report_rates; 3060 u8 max_rate_tries; 3061 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 3062 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 3063 u8 max_tx_fragments; 3064 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 3065 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 3066 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 3067 struct { 3068 int units_pos; 3069 s16 accuracy; 3070 } radiotap_timestamp; 3071 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 3072 u8 uapsd_queues; 3073 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 3074 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 3075 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 3076 u8 weight_multiplier; 3077 u32 max_mtu; 3078 const s8 *tx_power_levels; 3079 u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx; 3080 }; 3081 3082 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3083 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 3084 { 3085 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 3086 } 3087 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 3088 3089 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3090 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 3091 { 3092 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 3093 } 3094 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 3095 3096 /** 3097 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 3098 * 3099 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 3100 * @req: cfg80211 request. 3101 */ 3102 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 3103 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 3104 3105 /* Keep last */ 3106 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 3107 }; 3108 3109 /** 3110 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 3111 * 3112 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 3113 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 3114 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 3115 * @status: channel-switch response status 3116 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 3117 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 3118 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 3119 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 3120 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 3121 */ 3122 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 3123 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3124 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 3125 u8 action_code; 3126 u32 status; 3127 u32 timestamp; 3128 u16 switch_time; 3129 u16 switch_timeout; 3130 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 3131 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 3132 }; 3133 3134 /** 3135 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 3136 * 3137 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 3138 * 3139 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 3140 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 3141 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 3142 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 3143 * is already used internally by mac80211. 3144 * 3145 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 3146 */ 3147 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 3148 3149 /** 3150 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 3151 * 3152 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 3153 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 3154 */ 3155 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 3156 { 3157 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 3158 } 3159 3160 /** 3161 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 3162 * 3163 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 3164 * @addr: the address to set 3165 */ 3166 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 3167 { 3168 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 3169 } 3170 3171 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3172 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3173 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 3174 { 3175 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 3176 return NULL; 3177 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 3178 } 3179 3180 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3181 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3182 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 3183 { 3184 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 3185 return NULL; 3186 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 3187 } 3188 3189 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3190 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3191 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 3192 { 3193 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 3194 return NULL; 3195 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 3196 } 3197 3198 /** 3199 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 3200 * @hw: the hardware 3201 * @skb: the skb 3202 * 3203 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 3204 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 3205 */ 3206 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 3207 3208 /** 3209 * ieee80211_purge_tx_queue - purge TX skb queue 3210 * @hw: the hardware 3211 * @skbs: the skbs 3212 * 3213 * Free a set of transmit skbs. Use this function when device is going to stop 3214 * but some transmit skbs without TX status are still queued. 3215 * This function does not take the list lock and the caller must hold the 3216 * relevant locks to use it. 3217 */ 3218 void ieee80211_purge_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3219 struct sk_buff_head *skbs); 3220 3221 /** 3222 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 3223 * 3224 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 3225 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 3226 * 3227 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 3228 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 3229 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 3230 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 3231 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 3232 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 3233 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 3234 * 3235 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 3236 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 3237 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 3238 * 3239 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 3240 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 3241 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 3242 * hardware key index. You are free to use the full u8 range. 3243 * 3244 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 3245 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 3246 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 3247 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 3248 * 3249 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 3250 * 3251 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 3252 * for it has been uploaded to hardware. The stack will not make any 3253 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 3254 * based on the receive flags. 3255 * 3256 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 3257 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 3258 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 3259 * keys. 3260 * 3261 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 3262 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 3263 * handler. 3264 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 3265 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 3266 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 3267 * rekeying); it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 3268 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 3269 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 3270 * 3271 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 3272 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 3273 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 3274 * 3275 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 3276 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following 3277 * requirements: 3278 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211 3279 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed, 3280 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 3281 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 3282 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 3283 encrypted with the new key when also needing 3284 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and 3285 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 3286 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 3287 */ 3288 3289 /** 3290 * DOC: Powersave support 3291 * 3292 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 3293 * 3294 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself; 3295 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 3296 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 3297 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 3298 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 3299 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 3300 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 3301 * it finds traffic directed to it. 3302 * 3303 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 3304 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 3305 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 3306 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 3307 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 3308 * 3309 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 3310 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 3311 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 3312 * 3313 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 3314 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 3315 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 3316 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 3317 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 3318 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 3319 * as best as it can; mac80211 is too slow to do that. 3320 * 3321 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 3322 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 3323 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 3324 * the next wakeup. It's a compromise of getting good enough latency when 3325 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 3326 * periods. 3327 * 3328 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 3329 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 3330 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 3331 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 3332 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 3333 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 3334 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 3335 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 3336 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 3337 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 3338 * 3339 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 3340 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 3341 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 3342 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 3343 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 3344 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 3345 * 3346 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 3347 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 3348 */ 3349 3350 /** 3351 * DOC: Beacon filter support 3352 * 3353 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 3354 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 3355 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 3356 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 3357 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 3358 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 3359 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 3360 * 3361 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 3362 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 3363 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 3364 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 3365 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 3366 * 3367 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 3368 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 3369 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 3370 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 3371 * 3372 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 3373 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 3374 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 3375 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 3376 * 3377 * - a list of information element IDs 3378 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 3379 * 3380 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 3381 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 3382 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 3383 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 3384 * vendor information elements. 3385 * 3386 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 3387 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 3388 * 3389 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead. Just make sure nothing 3390 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 3391 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 3392 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 3393 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 3394 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 3395 * 3396 * 3397 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 3398 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 3399 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 3400 * the received data packets). This can consist of notifying the host when 3401 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 3402 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 3403 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 3404 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 3405 * 3406 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 3407 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 3408 * signal strength threshold checking. 3409 */ 3410 3411 /** 3412 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 3413 * 3414 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 3415 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 3416 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 3417 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 3418 * 3419 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 3420 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 3421 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 3422 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 3423 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 3424 * hardware flags. 3425 * 3426 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 3427 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 3428 * turned off otherwise. 3429 * 3430 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 3431 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 3432 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 3433 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 3434 */ 3435 3436 /** 3437 * DOC: Frame filtering 3438 * 3439 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 3440 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 3441 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 3442 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 3443 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 3444 * 3445 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 3446 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 3447 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 3448 * 3449 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 3450 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 3451 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 3452 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 3453 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 3454 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 3455 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 3456 * 3457 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 3458 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 3459 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 3460 * or dropped. 3461 * 3462 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 3463 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 3464 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 3465 * the flag, but not clear it. 3466 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 3467 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 3468 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 3469 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 3470 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 3471 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 3472 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 3473 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 3474 */ 3475 3476 /** 3477 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 3478 * 3479 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 3480 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 3481 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 3482 * 3483 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 3484 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 3485 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 3486 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 3487 * the driver code. 3488 * 3489 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 3490 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 3491 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 3492 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 3493 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 3494 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 3495 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 3496 * 3497 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 3498 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 3499 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 3500 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 3501 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 3502 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 3503 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 3504 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 3505 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 3506 * @sta_notify callback. 3507 * 3508 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 3509 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 3510 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 3511 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 3512 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 3513 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 3514 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 3515 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 3516 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 3517 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 3518 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 3519 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 3520 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 3521 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 3522 * 3523 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 3524 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 3525 * 3526 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 3527 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 3528 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 3529 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 3530 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 3531 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 3532 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 3533 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 3534 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 3535 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 3536 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 3537 * 3538 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 3539 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 3540 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 3541 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 3542 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 3543 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 3544 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 3545 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 3546 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 3547 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames. 3548 * To help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 3549 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 3550 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 3551 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 3552 * 3553 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 3554 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 3555 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 3556 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 3557 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 3558 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 3559 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 3560 * 3561 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 3562 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 3563 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 3564 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 3565 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3566 * 3567 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3568 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3569 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3570 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3571 */ 3572 3573 /** 3574 * DOC: HW queue control 3575 * 3576 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3577 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3578 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3579 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3580 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3581 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3582 * 3583 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3584 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3585 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3586 * 3587 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3588 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3589 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3590 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3591 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3592 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3593 * the hardware queue. 3594 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3595 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3596 * 3597 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed; multiple virtual 3598 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3599 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3600 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3601 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3602 * 3603 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3604 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3605 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3606 * off-channel queue: 9 3607 * 3608 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3609 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3610 * 3611 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3612 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3613 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3614 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3615 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3616 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3617 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3618 * 3619 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3620 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3621 * 3622 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3623 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3624 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3625 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3626 */ 3627 3628 /** 3629 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3630 * 3631 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3632 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3633 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3634 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3635 * 3636 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3637 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3638 * multicast address. 3639 * 3640 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3641 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3642 * 3643 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3644 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3645 * 3646 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3647 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3648 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3649 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3650 * honour this flag if possible. 3651 * 3652 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3653 * station 3654 * 3655 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3656 * 3657 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3658 * 3659 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3660 * 3661 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames 3662 */ 3663 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3664 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3665 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3666 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3667 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3668 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3669 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3670 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3671 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3672 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9, 3673 }; 3674 3675 /** 3676 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3677 * 3678 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3679 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3680 * 3681 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3682 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3683 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3684 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3685 * 3686 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3687 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3688 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3689 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or 3690 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status 3691 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after 3692 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special 3693 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3694 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3695 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3696 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3697 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3698 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3699 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3700 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3701 * session is gone and removes the station. 3702 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3703 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3704 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3705 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3706 */ 3707 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3708 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3709 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3710 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3711 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3712 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3713 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3714 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3715 }; 3716 3717 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3718 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2 3719 3720 /** 3721 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3722 * 3723 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3724 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3725 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3726 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3727 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3728 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3729 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3730 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3731 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3732 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3733 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3734 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3735 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3736 */ 3737 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3738 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3739 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3740 u16 tid; 3741 u16 ssn; 3742 u16 buf_size; 3743 bool amsdu; 3744 u16 timeout; 3745 }; 3746 3747 /** 3748 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3749 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3750 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3751 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3752 */ 3753 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3754 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3755 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3756 }; 3757 3758 /** 3759 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 3760 * 3761 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 3762 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 3763 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 3764 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 3765 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 3766 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 3767 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 3768 * the peer. 3769 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 3770 * by the peer 3771 */ 3772 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 3773 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 3774 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 3775 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 3776 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 3777 }; 3778 3779 /** 3780 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 3781 * 3782 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 3783 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 3784 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 3785 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 3786 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 3787 * 3788 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 3789 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 3790 * for sending management frames offchannel. 3791 */ 3792 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 3793 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 3794 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 3795 }; 3796 3797 /** 3798 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type 3799 * 3800 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 3801 * reconfiguration type was completed. 3802 * 3803 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 3804 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 3805 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 3806 * of wowlan configuration) 3807 */ 3808 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 3809 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 3810 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 3811 }; 3812 3813 /** 3814 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information 3815 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration, 3816 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method. 3817 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc) 3818 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only 3819 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only 3820 * valid for auth and (re)assoc. 3821 * @was_assoc: set if this call is due to deauth/disassoc 3822 * while just having been associated 3823 * @link_id: the link id on which the frame will be TX'ed. 3824 * Only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method. 3825 */ 3826 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info { 3827 u16 duration; 3828 u16 subtype; 3829 u8 success:1, was_assoc:1; 3830 int link_id; 3831 }; 3832 3833 /** 3834 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 3835 * 3836 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 3837 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 3838 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 3839 * 3840 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 3841 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 3842 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 3843 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 3844 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 3845 * Must be atomic. 3846 * 3847 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 3848 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 3849 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 3850 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 3851 * or zero. 3852 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 3853 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 3854 * is added. 3855 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3856 * 3857 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 3858 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 3859 * it must turn off frame reception.) 3860 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 3861 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 3862 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 3863 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3864 * 3865 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 3866 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 3867 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 3868 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 3869 * reconfigured at resume time. 3870 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 3871 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 3872 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 3873 * must return 1 from this function. 3874 * 3875 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 3876 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 3877 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 3878 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 3879 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 3880 * 3881 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 3882 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 3883 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 3884 * in suspend(). 3885 * 3886 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 3887 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 3888 * and @stop must be implemented. 3889 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 3890 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 3891 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 3892 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 3893 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 3894 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3895 * 3896 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 3897 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 3898 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 3899 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 3900 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 3901 * 3902 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 3903 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 3904 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 3905 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 3906 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 3907 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 3908 * MAC address of the device going away. 3909 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 3910 * 3911 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 3912 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 3913 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 3914 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 3915 * 3916 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 3917 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 3918 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 3919 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 3920 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 3921 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 3922 * can sleep. 3923 * Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed 3924 * are not implemented. 3925 * 3926 * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface 3927 * (MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the 3928 * lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.) 3929 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed. 3930 * The callback can sleep. 3931 * 3932 * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link 3933 * parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an 3934 * individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information. 3935 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id 3936 * parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for 3937 * non-MLO connections. 3938 * The callback can sleep. 3939 * 3940 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 3941 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 3942 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 3943 * 3944 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 3945 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 3946 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 3947 * 3948 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 3949 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 3950 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 3951 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 3952 * which flags are changed. 3953 * This callback can sleep. 3954 * 3955 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 3956 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 3957 * 3958 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3959 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 3960 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 3961 * is enabled. 3962 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 3963 * The callback can sleep. 3964 * 3965 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3966 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 3967 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 3968 * The callback must be atomic. 3969 * 3970 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 3971 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 3972 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 3973 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 3974 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 3975 * 3976 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 3977 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 3978 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 3979 * 3980 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 3981 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 3982 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 3983 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 3984 * that power save is disabled. 3985 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 3986 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 3987 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 3988 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 3989 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 3990 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 3991 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 3992 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 3993 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 3994 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 3995 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 3996 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 3997 * The callback can sleep. 3998 * 3999 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 4000 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 4001 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 4002 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 4003 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 4004 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 4005 * The callback can sleep. 4006 * 4007 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 4008 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 4009 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 4010 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 4011 * 4012 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 4013 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 4014 * 4015 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 4016 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 4017 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 4018 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 4019 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 4020 * 4021 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 4022 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 4023 * this notification. 4024 * The callback can sleep. 4025 * 4026 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 4027 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 4028 * The callback can sleep. 4029 * 4030 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 4031 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 4032 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 4033 * The callback must be atomic. 4034 * 4035 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 4036 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 4037 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 4038 * should be set as well. 4039 * The callback can sleep. 4040 * 4041 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 4042 * The callback can sleep. 4043 * 4044 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 4045 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 4046 * 4047 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 4048 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 4049 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 4050 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 4051 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 4052 * This callback can sleep. 4053 * 4054 * @vif_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add a debugfs vif 4055 * directory with its files. This callback should be within a 4056 * CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep. 4057 * 4058 * @link_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4059 * when a link is added to a mac80211 vif. This callback should be within 4060 * a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep. 4061 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the default bss_conf 4062 * with the vif's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 4063 * 4064 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4065 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 4066 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 4067 * callback can sleep. 4068 * 4069 * @link_sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4070 * when a link is added to a mac80211 station. This callback 4071 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 4072 * callback can sleep. 4073 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the deflink with the 4074 * station's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 4075 * 4076 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 4077 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 4078 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 4079 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 4080 * 4081 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 4082 * power for the station. 4083 * This callback can sleep. 4084 * 4085 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 4086 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 4087 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 4088 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 4089 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 4090 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 4091 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 4092 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 4093 * The callback can sleep. 4094 * 4095 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 4096 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 4097 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 4098 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 4099 * in @sta_state. 4100 * The callback can sleep. 4101 * 4102 * @link_sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can 4103 * be used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 4104 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 4105 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 4106 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 4107 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 4108 * Must be atomic. 4109 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 4110 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 4111 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 4112 * 4113 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 4114 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 4115 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 4116 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 4117 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 4118 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 4119 * The callback can sleep. 4120 * 4121 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 4122 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 4123 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 4124 * The callback can sleep. 4125 * 4126 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 4127 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 4128 * required function. 4129 * The callback can sleep. 4130 * 4131 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 4132 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 4133 * required function. 4134 * The callback can sleep. 4135 * 4136 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 4137 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 4138 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 4139 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 4140 * The callback can sleep. 4141 * 4142 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 4143 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 4144 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 4145 * TSF synchronization. 4146 * The callback can sleep. 4147 * 4148 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 4149 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 4150 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 4151 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 4152 * The callback can sleep. 4153 * 4154 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 4155 * 4156 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 4157 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 4158 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 4159 * The callback can sleep. 4160 * 4161 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 4162 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 4163 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 4164 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 4165 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 4166 * 4167 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 4168 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 4169 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 4170 * 4171 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 4172 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 4173 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 4174 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 4175 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 4176 * Note that vif can be NULL. 4177 * The callback can sleep. 4178 * 4179 * @flush_sta: Flush or drop all pending frames from the hardware queue(s) for 4180 * the given station, as it's about to be removed. 4181 * The callback can sleep. 4182 * 4183 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 4184 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 4185 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 4186 * completion of the channel switch. 4187 * 4188 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 4189 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 4190 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 4191 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 4192 * 4193 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 4194 * 4195 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 4196 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 4197 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 4198 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 4199 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 4200 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 4201 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 4202 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 4203 * must be accepted in this case. 4204 * This callback may sleep. 4205 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 4206 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 4207 * 4208 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 4209 * 4210 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 4211 * 4212 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 4213 * queues before entering power save. 4214 * 4215 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 4216 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 4217 * The callback can sleep. 4218 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 4219 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 4220 * The callback must be atomic. 4221 * 4222 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 4223 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 4224 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 4225 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 4226 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 4227 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 4228 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 4229 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 4230 * more-data bit must always be set. 4231 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 4232 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 4233 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 4234 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 4235 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4236 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 4237 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 4238 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 4239 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 4240 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 4241 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 4242 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 4243 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 4244 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 4245 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 4246 * This callback must be atomic. 4247 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 4248 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 4249 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 4250 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 4251 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 4252 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 4253 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4254 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 4255 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 4256 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 4257 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 4258 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 4259 * This callback must be atomic. 4260 * 4261 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 4262 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's 4263 * expected to return a static value. 4264 * 4265 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 4266 * 4267 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 4268 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 4269 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's 4270 * expected to return a static value. 4271 * 4272 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 4273 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 4274 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 4275 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 4276 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 4277 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 4278 * management frame prior to transmitting that frame to allow the driver 4279 * to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response and be 4280 * able to synchronize with the GO. 4281 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 4282 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 4283 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info 4284 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the 4285 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested. 4286 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 4287 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously 4288 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data 4289 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used. 4290 * 4291 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 4292 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 4293 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 4294 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 4295 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 4296 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 4297 * 2 * (DTIM period). 4298 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 4299 * 4300 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 4301 * This callback may sleep. 4302 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 4303 * This callback may sleep. 4304 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 4305 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 4306 * channel context with different settings 4307 * This callback may sleep. 4308 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 4309 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 4310 * This callback may sleep. 4311 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 4312 * unbound from vif. 4313 * This callback may sleep. 4314 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 4315 * another, as specified in the list of 4316 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 4317 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 4318 * This callback may sleep. 4319 * 4320 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 4321 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 4322 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 4323 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 4324 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 4325 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 4326 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 4327 * 4328 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 4329 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 4330 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 4331 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 4332 * This callback may sleep. 4333 * 4334 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 4335 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 4336 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 4337 * 4338 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 4339 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 4340 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 4341 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 4342 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 4343 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 4344 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been 4345 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 4346 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 4347 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 4348 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4349 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 4350 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 4351 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 4352 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4353 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 4354 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4355 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4356 * when channel switch procedure was aborted, allowing the 4357 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4358 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 4359 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 4360 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 4361 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 4362 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 4363 * channel context is bound before this is called. 4364 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 4365 * 4366 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 4367 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 4368 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 4369 * 4370 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 4371 * and hardware limits. 4372 * 4373 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 4374 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 4375 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 4376 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 4377 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 4378 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 4379 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 4380 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 4381 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 4382 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 4383 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 4384 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 4385 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 4386 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 4387 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 4388 * the function call. 4389 * 4390 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 4391 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 4392 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 4393 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 4394 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 4395 * 4396 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 4397 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 4398 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 4399 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 4400 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 4401 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 4402 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 4403 * changed parameters. 4404 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 4405 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 4406 * this call. 4407 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 4408 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 4409 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 4410 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 4411 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 4412 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 4413 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 4414 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 4415 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 4416 * 4417 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 4418 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 4419 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 4420 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 4421 * This callback may sleep. 4422 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags 4423 * This callback may sleep. 4424 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using 4425 * 4-address mode 4426 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings. 4427 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed 4428 * to use rx decapsulation offload 4429 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer. 4430 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters 4431 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement. 4432 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of 4433 * twt structure. 4434 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received 4435 * from the peer. 4436 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for 4437 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit 4438 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev. 4439 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime 4440 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected 4441 * radar channel. 4442 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to 4443 * disable background CAC/radar detection. 4444 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to 4445 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading 4446 * @can_activate_links: Checks if a specific active_links bitmap is 4447 * supported by the driver. 4448 * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while 4449 * removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer), 4450 * but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or 4451 * new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation. 4452 * The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures 4453 * that were already removed, in case they're needed. 4454 * This callback can sleep. 4455 * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to 4456 * @change_vif_links. This callback can sleep. 4457 * Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links, 4458 * i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero. 4459 * In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them. 4460 * @set_hw_timestamp: Enable/disable HW timestamping of TM/FTM frames. This is 4461 * not restored at HW reset by mac80211 so drivers need to take care of 4462 * that. 4463 * @net_setup_tc: Called from .ndo_setup_tc in order to prepare hardware 4464 * flow offloading for flows originating from the vif. 4465 * Note that the driver must not assume that the vif driver_data is valid 4466 * at this point, since the callback can be called during netdev teardown. 4467 * @can_neg_ttlm: for managed interface, requests the driver to determine 4468 * if the requested TID-To-Link mapping can be accepted or not. 4469 * If it's not accepted the driver may suggest a preferred mapping and 4470 * modify @ttlm parameter with the suggested TID-to-Link mapping. 4471 * @prep_add_interface: prepare for interface addition. This can be used by 4472 * drivers to prepare for the addition of a new interface, e.g., allocate 4473 * the needed resources etc. This callback doesn't guarantee that an 4474 * interface with the specified type would be added, and thus drivers that 4475 * implement this callback need to handle such cases. The type is the full 4476 * &enum nl80211_iftype. 4477 */ 4478 struct ieee80211_ops { 4479 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4480 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 4481 struct sk_buff *skb); 4482 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4483 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool suspend); 4484 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 4485 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 4486 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4487 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 4488 #endif 4489 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4490 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4491 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4492 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4493 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 4494 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4495 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4496 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed); 4497 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4498 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4499 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4500 u64 changed); 4501 void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4502 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4503 u64 changed); 4504 void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4505 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4506 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4507 u64 changed); 4508 4509 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4510 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4511 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4512 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4513 4514 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4515 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 4516 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4517 unsigned int changed_flags, 4518 unsigned int *total_flags, 4519 u64 multicast); 4520 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4521 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4522 unsigned int filter_flags, 4523 unsigned int changed_flags); 4524 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4525 bool set); 4526 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 4527 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4528 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 4529 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4530 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4531 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 4532 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4533 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 4534 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4535 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4536 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 4537 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4538 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 4539 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4540 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 4541 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4542 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4543 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4544 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4545 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 4546 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 4547 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4548 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4549 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4550 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4551 const u8 *mac_addr); 4552 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4553 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4554 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4555 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 4556 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4557 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 4558 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 4559 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4560 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4561 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4562 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4563 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4564 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4565 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 4566 void (*vif_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4567 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4568 void (*link_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4569 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4570 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4571 struct dentry *dir); 4572 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4573 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4574 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4575 struct dentry *dir); 4576 void (*link_sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4577 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4578 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4579 struct dentry *dir); 4580 #endif 4581 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4582 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4583 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4584 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4585 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4586 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4587 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4588 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 4589 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 4590 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4591 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4592 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4593 void (*link_sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4594 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4595 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4596 u32 changed); 4597 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4598 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4599 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4600 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4601 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4602 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4603 struct station_info *sinfo); 4604 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4605 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4606 unsigned int link_id, u16 ac, 4607 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 4608 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4609 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4610 u64 tsf); 4611 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4612 s64 offset); 4613 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4614 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4615 4616 /** 4617 * @ampdu_action: 4618 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 4619 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 4620 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 4621 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 4622 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 4623 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 4624 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 4625 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 4626 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 4627 * 4628 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 4629 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 4630 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 4631 * 4632 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 4633 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 4634 * 4635 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 4636 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 4637 * - ``TX: 81`` 4638 * 4639 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 4640 * 4641 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 4642 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 4643 * if the session can start immediately. 4644 * 4645 * The callback can sleep. 4646 */ 4647 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4648 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4649 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 4650 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 4651 struct survey_info *survey); 4652 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4653 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class); 4654 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 4655 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4656 void *data, int len); 4657 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 4658 struct netlink_callback *cb, 4659 void *data, int len); 4660 #endif 4661 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4662 u32 queues, bool drop); 4663 void (*flush_sta)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4664 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4665 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4666 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4667 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4668 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 4669 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 4670 4671 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4672 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4673 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 4674 int duration, 4675 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 4676 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4677 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4678 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 4679 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4680 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 4681 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4682 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4683 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 4684 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4685 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4686 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 4687 4688 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4689 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4690 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4691 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4692 bool more_data); 4693 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4694 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4695 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4696 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4697 bool more_data); 4698 4699 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4700 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 4701 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4702 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4703 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 4704 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4705 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4706 u32 sset, u8 *data); 4707 4708 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4709 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4710 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4711 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4712 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4713 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4714 4715 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4716 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4717 unsigned int link_id); 4718 4719 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4720 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4721 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4722 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4723 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4724 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4725 u32 changed); 4726 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4727 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4728 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4729 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4730 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4731 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4732 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4733 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4734 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4735 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 4736 int n_vifs, 4737 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 4738 4739 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4740 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 4741 4742 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 4743 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4744 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4745 struct inet6_dev *idev); 4746 #endif 4747 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4748 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4749 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4750 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4751 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4752 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4753 4754 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4755 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4756 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4757 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4758 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4759 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4760 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4761 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4762 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4763 4764 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4765 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4766 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4767 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4768 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4769 unsigned int link_id, int *dbm); 4770 4771 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4772 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4773 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 4774 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 4775 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 4776 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4777 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4778 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4779 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4780 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4781 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 4782 4783 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4784 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 4785 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4786 4787 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4788 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4789 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 4790 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4791 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4792 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4793 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4794 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 4795 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4796 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4797 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 4798 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4799 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4800 u8 instance_id); 4801 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4802 struct sk_buff *head, 4803 struct sk_buff *skb); 4804 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4805 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4806 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 4807 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4808 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4809 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4810 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4811 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4812 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4813 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4814 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 4815 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4816 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4817 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 4818 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4819 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4820 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4821 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4822 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4823 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar); 4824 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4825 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4826 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4827 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4828 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4829 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt); 4830 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4831 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid); 4832 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4833 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4834 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4835 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4836 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4837 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx, 4838 struct net_device_path *path); 4839 bool (*can_activate_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4840 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4841 u16 active_links); 4842 int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4843 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4844 u16 old_links, u16 new_links, 4845 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]); 4846 int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4847 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4848 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4849 u16 old_links, u16 new_links); 4850 int (*set_hw_timestamp)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4851 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4852 struct cfg80211_set_hw_timestamp *hwts); 4853 int (*net_setup_tc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4854 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4855 struct net_device *dev, 4856 enum tc_setup_type type, 4857 void *type_data); 4858 enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res 4859 (*can_neg_ttlm)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4860 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm *ttlm); 4861 void (*prep_add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4862 enum nl80211_iftype type); 4863 }; 4864 4865 /** 4866 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 4867 * 4868 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4869 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4870 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4871 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4872 * @priv_data_len. 4873 * 4874 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4875 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4876 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 4877 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 4878 * 4879 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4880 */ 4881 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 4882 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 4883 const char *requested_name); 4884 4885 /** 4886 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 4887 * 4888 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4889 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4890 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4891 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4892 * @priv_data_len. 4893 * 4894 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4895 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4896 * 4897 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4898 */ 4899 static inline 4900 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 4901 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 4902 { 4903 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 4904 } 4905 4906 /** 4907 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 4908 * 4909 * You must call this function before any other functions in 4910 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 4911 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 4912 * 4913 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 4914 * 4915 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 4916 */ 4917 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4918 4919 /** 4920 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 4921 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 4922 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 4923 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 4924 */ 4925 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 4926 int throughput; 4927 int blink_time; 4928 }; 4929 4930 /** 4931 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 4932 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 4933 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 4934 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 4935 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 4936 */ 4937 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 4938 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 4939 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 4940 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 4941 }; 4942 4943 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4944 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4945 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4946 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4947 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4948 const char * 4949 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4950 unsigned int flags, 4951 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4952 unsigned int blink_table_len); 4953 #endif 4954 /** 4955 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 4956 * 4957 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4958 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4959 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4960 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4961 * 4962 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4963 * 4964 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4965 */ 4966 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4967 { 4968 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4969 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 4970 #else 4971 return NULL; 4972 #endif 4973 } 4974 4975 /** 4976 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 4977 * 4978 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4979 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4980 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4981 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4982 * 4983 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4984 * 4985 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4986 */ 4987 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4988 { 4989 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4990 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 4991 #else 4992 return NULL; 4993 #endif 4994 } 4995 4996 /** 4997 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 4998 * 4999 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5000 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5001 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5002 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5003 * 5004 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5005 * 5006 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5007 */ 5008 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5009 { 5010 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5011 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 5012 #else 5013 return NULL; 5014 #endif 5015 } 5016 5017 /** 5018 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 5019 * 5020 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5021 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5022 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5023 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5024 * 5025 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5026 * 5027 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5028 */ 5029 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5030 { 5031 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5032 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 5033 #else 5034 return NULL; 5035 #endif 5036 } 5037 5038 /** 5039 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 5040 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 5041 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 5042 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 5043 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 5044 * 5045 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 5046 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 5047 * 5048 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 5049 */ 5050 static inline const char * 5051 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 5052 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 5053 unsigned int blink_table_len) 5054 { 5055 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5056 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 5057 blink_table_len); 5058 #else 5059 return NULL; 5060 #endif 5061 } 5062 5063 /** 5064 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 5065 * 5066 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 5067 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 5068 * 5069 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 5070 */ 5071 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5072 5073 /** 5074 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 5075 * 5076 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 5077 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 5078 * before calling this function. 5079 * 5080 * @hw: the hardware to free 5081 */ 5082 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5083 5084 /** 5085 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 5086 * 5087 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 5088 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 5089 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 5090 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 5091 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 5092 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 5093 * 5094 * @hw: the hardware to restart 5095 */ 5096 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5097 5098 /** 5099 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list 5100 * 5101 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5102 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5103 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5104 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5105 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5106 * 5107 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5108 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5109 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5110 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5111 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5112 * 5113 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock 5114 * 5115 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5116 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 5117 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5118 * @list: the destination list 5119 */ 5120 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5121 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list); 5122 5123 /** 5124 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 5125 * 5126 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5127 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5128 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5129 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5130 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5131 * 5132 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5133 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5134 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5135 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5136 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5137 * 5138 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 5139 * 5140 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5141 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 5142 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5143 * @napi: the NAPI context 5144 */ 5145 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5146 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 5147 5148 /** 5149 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 5150 * 5151 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5152 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5153 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5154 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5155 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5156 * 5157 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5158 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5159 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5160 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5161 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5162 * 5163 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5164 * 5165 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5166 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5167 */ 5168 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 5169 { 5170 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 5171 } 5172 5173 /** 5174 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 5175 * 5176 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 5177 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5178 * 5179 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 5180 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 5181 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5182 * 5183 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5184 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5185 */ 5186 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 5187 5188 /** 5189 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 5190 * 5191 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 5192 * (internally disables bottom halves). 5193 * 5194 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 5195 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5196 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5197 * 5198 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5199 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5200 */ 5201 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5202 struct sk_buff *skb) 5203 { 5204 local_bh_disable(); 5205 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 5206 local_bh_enable(); 5207 } 5208 5209 /** 5210 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 5211 * 5212 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 5213 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 5214 * entering/leaving PS mode. 5215 * 5216 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 5217 * 5218 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 5219 * each other. 5220 * 5221 * @sta: currently connected sta 5222 * @start: start or stop PS 5223 * 5224 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 5225 */ 5226 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 5227 5228 /** 5229 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 5230 * (in process context) 5231 * 5232 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 5233 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 5234 * applies. 5235 * 5236 * @sta: currently connected sta 5237 * @start: start or stop PS 5238 * 5239 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 5240 */ 5241 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5242 bool start) 5243 { 5244 int ret; 5245 5246 local_bh_disable(); 5247 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 5248 local_bh_enable(); 5249 5250 return ret; 5251 } 5252 5253 /** 5254 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 5255 * @sta: currently connected station 5256 * 5257 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5258 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 5259 * connected station was received. 5260 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5261 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 5262 * be serialized. 5263 */ 5264 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5265 5266 /** 5267 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 5268 * @sta: currently connected station 5269 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 5270 * 5271 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5272 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 5273 * from a connected station was received. 5274 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5275 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 5276 * serialized. 5277 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 5278 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 5279 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 5280 * checks. 5281 */ 5282 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 5283 5284 /* 5285 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 5286 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 5287 */ 5288 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 5289 5290 /** 5291 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 5292 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 5293 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 5294 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 5295 * 5296 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 5297 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 5298 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 5299 * 5300 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 5301 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 5302 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 5303 * call! Beware of the locking!) 5304 * 5305 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 5306 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 5307 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 5308 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 5309 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 5310 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 5311 * 5312 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 5313 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 5314 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 5315 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 5316 * use this API. 5317 */ 5318 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5319 u8 tid, bool buffered); 5320 5321 /** 5322 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 5323 * 5324 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 5325 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 5326 * rate selection table for the station entry. 5327 * 5328 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5329 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 5330 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 5331 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 5332 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 5333 */ 5334 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5335 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5336 struct sk_buff *skb, 5337 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 5338 int max_rates); 5339 5340 /** 5341 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station 5342 * 5343 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput 5344 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can 5345 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station 5346 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic 5347 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause 5348 * slow stations to starve). 5349 * 5350 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for. 5351 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps. 5352 */ 5353 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5354 u32 thr); 5355 5356 /** 5357 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 5358 * 5359 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 5360 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 5361 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 5362 * 5363 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5364 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 5365 * @info: tx status information 5366 */ 5367 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5368 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5369 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 5370 5371 /** 5372 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb - transmit status callback 5373 * 5374 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 5375 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 5376 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 5377 * 5378 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5379 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 5380 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 5381 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5382 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5383 * 5384 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5385 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5386 */ 5387 void ieee80211_tx_status_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5388 struct sk_buff *skb); 5389 5390 /** 5391 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 5392 * 5393 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb() 5394 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 5395 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 5396 * 5397 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5398 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5399 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5400 * 5401 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5402 * @status: tx status information 5403 */ 5404 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5405 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 5406 5407 /** 5408 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 5409 * 5410 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb() 5411 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 5412 * specific skbs. 5413 * 5414 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5415 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5416 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5417 * 5418 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5419 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 5420 * (NULL for multicast packets) 5421 * @info: tx status information 5422 */ 5423 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5424 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5425 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 5426 { 5427 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 5428 .sta = sta, 5429 .info = info, 5430 }; 5431 5432 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 5433 } 5434 5435 /** 5436 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 5437 * 5438 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in process context. 5439 * 5440 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and 5441 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 5442 * for a single hardware. 5443 * 5444 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5445 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5446 */ 5447 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5448 struct sk_buff *skb) 5449 { 5450 local_bh_disable(); 5451 ieee80211_tx_status_skb(hw, skb); 5452 local_bh_enable(); 5453 } 5454 5455 /** 5456 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 5457 * 5458 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in IRQ context 5459 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5460 * 5461 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and 5462 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5463 * 5464 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5465 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5466 */ 5467 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5468 struct sk_buff *skb); 5469 5470 /** 5471 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 5472 * 5473 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 5474 * connected STA. 5475 * 5476 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 5477 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 5478 */ 5479 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 5480 5481 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2 5482 5483 /** 5484 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 5485 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 5486 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 5487 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 5488 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which 5489 * should be ignored. 5490 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element 5491 */ 5492 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 5493 u16 tim_offset; 5494 u16 tim_length; 5495 5496 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM]; 5497 u16 mbssid_off; 5498 }; 5499 5500 /** 5501 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 5502 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5503 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5504 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5505 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5506 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5507 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5508 * 5509 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5510 * obtain the beacon template. 5511 * 5512 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 5513 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 5514 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 5515 * applicable, the CSA count. 5516 * 5517 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5518 * 5519 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5520 */ 5521 struct sk_buff * 5522 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5523 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5524 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5525 unsigned int link_id); 5526 5527 /** 5528 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index - EMA beacon template generation 5529 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5530 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5531 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5532 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5533 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP). 5534 * @ema_index: index of the beacon in the EMA set. 5535 * 5536 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5537 * but returns a beacon template which includes multiple BSSID element at the 5538 * requested index. 5539 * 5540 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL indicates the end of EMA templates. 5541 */ 5542 struct sk_buff * 5543 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5544 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5545 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5546 unsigned int link_id, u8 ema_index); 5547 5548 /** 5549 * struct ieee80211_ema_beacons - List of EMA beacons 5550 * @cnt: count of EMA beacons. 5551 * 5552 * @bcn: array of EMA beacons. 5553 * @bcn.skb: the skb containing this specific beacon 5554 * @bcn.offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5555 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5556 */ 5557 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons { 5558 u8 cnt; 5559 struct { 5560 struct sk_buff *skb; 5561 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets offs; 5562 } bcn[]; 5563 }; 5564 5565 /** 5566 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list - EMA beacon template generation 5567 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5568 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5569 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5570 * 5571 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5572 * but allocates and returns a pointer to list of all beacon templates required 5573 * to cover all profiles in the multiple BSSID set. Each template includes only 5574 * one multiple BSSID element. 5575 * 5576 * Driver must call ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list() to free the memory. 5577 * 5578 * Return: EMA beacon templates of type struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *. 5579 * %NULL on error. 5580 */ 5581 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons * 5582 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5583 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5584 unsigned int link_id); 5585 5586 /** 5587 * ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list - free an EMA beacon template list 5588 * @ema_beacons: list of EMA beacons of type &struct ieee80211_ema_beacons pointers. 5589 * 5590 * This function will free a list previously acquired by calling 5591 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list() 5592 */ 5593 void ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list(struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *ema_beacons); 5594 5595 /** 5596 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 5597 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5598 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5599 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 5600 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5601 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 5602 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 5603 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5604 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5605 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5606 * 5607 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5608 * obtain the beacon frame. 5609 * 5610 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5611 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 5612 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 5613 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 5614 * 5615 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5616 * 5617 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5618 */ 5619 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5620 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5621 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length, 5622 unsigned int link_id); 5623 5624 /** 5625 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 5626 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5627 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5628 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5629 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5630 * 5631 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5632 * 5633 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5634 */ 5635 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5636 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5637 unsigned int link_id) 5638 { 5639 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id); 5640 } 5641 5642 /** 5643 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown 5644 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5645 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5646 * 5647 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 5648 * This function is called implicitly when 5649 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 5650 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 5651 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown. 5652 * 5653 * Return: new countdown value 5654 */ 5655 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5656 unsigned int link_id); 5657 5658 /** 5659 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown 5660 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5661 * @counter: the new value for the counter 5662 * 5663 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be 5664 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 5665 * 5666 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(), 5667 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 5668 */ 5669 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 5670 5671 /** 5672 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 5673 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5674 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5675 * 5676 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5677 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5678 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 5679 */ 5680 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id); 5681 5682 /** 5683 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1 5684 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5685 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5686 * 5687 * Return: %true if the countdown reached 1, %false otherwise 5688 */ 5689 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5690 unsigned int link_id); 5691 5692 /** 5693 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change 5694 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5695 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5696 * 5697 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5698 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5699 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed 5700 */ 5701 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 link_id); 5702 5703 /** 5704 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 5705 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5706 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5707 * 5708 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5709 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 5710 * 5711 * Can only be called in AP mode. 5712 * 5713 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 5714 */ 5715 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5716 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5717 5718 /** 5719 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 5720 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5721 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5722 * 5723 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 5724 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5725 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 5726 * 5727 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5728 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 5729 * 5730 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 5731 */ 5732 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5733 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5734 5735 /** 5736 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 5737 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5738 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5739 * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses 5740 * for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with 5741 * MLD addresses, however useful that might be. 5742 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 5743 * if at all possible 5744 * 5745 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 5746 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5747 * BSSID and address is used. 5748 * 5749 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 5750 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 5751 * 5752 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5753 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 5754 * 5755 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 5756 */ 5757 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5758 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5759 int link_id, bool qos_ok); 5760 5761 /** 5762 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5763 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5764 * @src_addr: source MAC address 5765 * @ssid: SSID buffer 5766 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 5767 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 5768 * 5769 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5770 * hardware. 5771 * 5772 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5773 */ 5774 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5775 const u8 *src_addr, 5776 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 5777 size_t tailroom); 5778 5779 /** 5780 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 5781 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5782 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5783 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5784 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5785 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5786 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 5787 * 5788 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5789 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5790 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5791 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 5792 */ 5793 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5794 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5795 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5796 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 5797 5798 /** 5799 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 5800 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5801 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5802 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5803 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5804 * 5805 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5806 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5807 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5808 * 5809 * Return: The duration. 5810 */ 5811 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5812 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 5813 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5814 5815 /** 5816 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 5817 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5818 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5819 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5820 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5821 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5822 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 5823 * 5824 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5825 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5826 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5827 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 5828 */ 5829 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5830 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5831 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5832 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5833 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 5834 5835 /** 5836 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 5837 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5838 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5839 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5840 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5841 * 5842 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5843 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5844 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5845 * 5846 * Return: The duration. 5847 */ 5848 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5849 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5850 size_t frame_len, 5851 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5852 5853 /** 5854 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 5855 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5856 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5857 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 5858 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 5859 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 5860 * 5861 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 5862 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 5863 * 5864 * Return: The duration. 5865 */ 5866 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5867 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5868 enum nl80211_band band, 5869 size_t frame_len, 5870 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 5871 5872 /** 5873 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 5874 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5875 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5876 * 5877 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 5878 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 5879 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 5880 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 5881 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 5882 * 5883 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 5884 * frames are available. 5885 * 5886 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 5887 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 5888 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 5889 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 5890 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 5891 * use common code for all beacons. 5892 */ 5893 struct sk_buff * 5894 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5895 5896 /** 5897 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 5898 * 5899 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 5900 * 5901 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5902 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5903 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5904 */ 5905 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5906 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5907 5908 /** 5909 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 5910 * 5911 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 5912 * from the given packet. 5913 * 5914 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5915 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 5916 * with this P1K 5917 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5918 */ 5919 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5920 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 5921 { 5922 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 5923 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 5924 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 5925 5926 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 5927 } 5928 5929 /** 5930 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 5931 * 5932 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 5933 * and transmitter address. 5934 * 5935 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5936 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 5937 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5938 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5939 */ 5940 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5941 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5942 5943 /** 5944 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 5945 * 5946 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 5947 * in the packet. 5948 * 5949 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5950 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 5951 * encrypted with this key 5952 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 5953 */ 5954 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5955 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 5956 5957 /** 5958 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 5959 * 5960 * @pos: start of crypto header 5961 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5962 * @pn: PN to add 5963 * 5964 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 5965 * the packet payload) 5966 * 5967 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 5968 * point to the crypto header) 5969 */ 5970 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 5971 5972 /** 5973 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 5974 * 5975 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5976 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5977 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5978 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5979 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 5980 * 5981 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 5982 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 5983 * by the device and not by mac80211. 5984 * 5985 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5986 * can be done concurrently. 5987 */ 5988 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5989 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5990 5991 /** 5992 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 5993 * 5994 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5995 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5996 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5997 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5998 * @seq: new sequence data 5999 * 6000 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 6001 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 6002 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 6003 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 6004 * 6005 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 6006 * can be done concurrently. 6007 */ 6008 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6009 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 6010 6011 /** 6012 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key 6013 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6014 * 6015 * Context: Must be called with the wiphy mutex held. 6016 * 6017 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the 6018 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but 6019 * instead assumed to have been removed already. 6020 */ 6021 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6022 6023 /** 6024 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 6025 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 6026 * @keyconf: new key data 6027 * @link_id: the link id of the key or -1 for non-MLO 6028 * 6029 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 6030 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 6031 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 6032 * 6033 * Return: the newly allocated key structure, which will have 6034 * similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 6035 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 6036 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 6037 * 6038 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 6039 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 6040 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 6041 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 6042 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 6043 * of the reconfiguration. 6044 * 6045 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 6046 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 6047 * 6048 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 6049 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases 6050 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for 6051 * the key that's being replaced. 6052 */ 6053 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 6054 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6055 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6056 int link_id); 6057 6058 /** 6059 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 6060 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 6061 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 6062 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 6063 * @gfp: allocation flags 6064 */ 6065 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 6066 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 6067 6068 /** 6069 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key 6070 * 6071 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 6072 * at the same time. 6073 * 6074 * @keyconf: the key in question 6075 */ 6076 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6077 6078 /** 6079 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key 6080 * 6081 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 6082 * at the same time. 6083 * 6084 * @keyconf: the key in question 6085 */ 6086 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6087 6088 /** 6089 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 6090 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6091 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6092 * 6093 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 6094 */ 6095 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6096 6097 /** 6098 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 6099 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6100 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6101 * 6102 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 6103 */ 6104 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6105 6106 /** 6107 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 6108 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6109 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6110 * 6111 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_queue_stopped. 6112 * 6113 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 6114 */ 6115 6116 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6117 6118 /** 6119 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 6120 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6121 * 6122 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_stop_all_queues. 6123 */ 6124 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6125 6126 /** 6127 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 6128 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6129 * 6130 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_wake_all_queues. 6131 */ 6132 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6133 6134 /** 6135 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 6136 * 6137 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 6138 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 6139 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 6140 * any context, including hardirq context. 6141 * 6142 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 6143 * @info: information about the completed scan 6144 */ 6145 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6146 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 6147 6148 /** 6149 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 6150 * 6151 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 6152 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 6153 * 6154 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 6155 */ 6156 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6157 6158 /** 6159 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 6160 * 6161 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 6162 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 6163 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 6164 * while associating, for instance. 6165 * 6166 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 6167 */ 6168 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6169 6170 /** 6171 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 6172 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 6173 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 6174 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 6175 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 6176 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 6177 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 6178 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 6179 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 6180 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA 6181 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery 6182 * for instance. 6183 */ 6184 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 6185 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 6186 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 6187 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 6188 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2), 6189 }; 6190 6191 /** 6192 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 6193 * 6194 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6195 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 6196 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 6197 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6198 * 6199 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6200 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6201 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6202 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6203 */ 6204 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 6205 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6206 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6207 void *data); 6208 6209 /** 6210 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 6211 * 6212 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6213 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6214 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 6215 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 6216 * be used. 6217 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6218 * 6219 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6220 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6221 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6222 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6223 */ 6224 static inline void 6225 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 6226 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6227 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6228 void *data) 6229 { 6230 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 6231 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 6232 iterator, data); 6233 } 6234 6235 /** 6236 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 6237 * 6238 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6239 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6240 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 6241 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 6242 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6243 * 6244 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6245 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6246 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6247 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6248 */ 6249 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6250 u32 iter_flags, 6251 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6252 u8 *mac, 6253 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6254 void *data); 6255 6256 /** 6257 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces 6258 * 6259 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6260 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6261 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex. 6262 * 6263 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6264 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6265 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6266 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6267 */ 6268 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6269 u32 iter_flags, 6270 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6271 u8 *mac, 6272 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6273 void *data); 6274 6275 /** 6276 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 6277 * 6278 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 6279 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 6280 * function for them. 6281 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 6282 * 6283 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6284 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6285 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6286 */ 6287 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6288 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6289 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 6290 void *data); 6291 6292 /** 6293 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_mtx - iterate stations 6294 * 6295 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 6296 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 6297 * function for them. This version can only be used while holding the wiphy 6298 * mutex. 6299 * 6300 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6301 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6302 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6303 */ 6304 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6305 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6306 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 6307 void *data); 6308 6309 /** 6310 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6311 * 6312 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 6313 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 6314 * 6315 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6316 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 6317 */ 6318 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 6319 6320 /** 6321 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6322 * 6323 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 6324 * workqueue. 6325 * 6326 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6327 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 6328 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 6329 */ 6330 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6331 struct delayed_work *dwork, 6332 unsigned long delay); 6333 6334 /** 6335 * ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer - Refresh a tx agg session timer. 6336 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6337 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6338 * 6339 * This function allows low level driver to refresh tx agg session timer 6340 * to maintain BA session, the session level will still be managed by the 6341 * mac80211. 6342 * 6343 * Note: must be called in an RCU critical section. 6344 */ 6345 void ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6346 u16 tid); 6347 6348 /** 6349 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 6350 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6351 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6352 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 6353 * 6354 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 6355 * 6356 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6357 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6358 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6359 */ 6360 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 6361 u16 timeout); 6362 6363 /** 6364 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 6365 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6366 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6367 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6368 * 6369 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6370 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 6371 * from any context. 6372 */ 6373 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6374 u16 tid); 6375 6376 /** 6377 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 6378 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 6379 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 6380 * 6381 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 6382 * 6383 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6384 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6385 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6386 */ 6387 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 6388 6389 /** 6390 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 6391 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6392 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6393 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 6394 * 6395 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6396 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 6397 * can be called from any context. 6398 */ 6399 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6400 u16 tid); 6401 6402 /** 6403 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 6404 * 6405 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 6406 * @addr: station's address 6407 * 6408 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6409 * 6410 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6411 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6412 */ 6413 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6414 const u8 *addr); 6415 6416 /** 6417 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 6418 * 6419 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6420 * @addr: remote station's address 6421 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 6422 * 6423 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6424 * 6425 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6426 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6427 * 6428 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 6429 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 6430 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 6431 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 6432 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 6433 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 6434 * is not reliable. 6435 * 6436 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 6437 */ 6438 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6439 const u8 *addr, 6440 const u8 *localaddr); 6441 6442 /** 6443 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses 6444 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6445 * @addr: remote station's link address 6446 * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that) 6447 * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found, 6448 * may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed 6449 * 6450 * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection. 6451 * 6452 * Return: pointer to STA if found, otherwise %NULL. 6453 */ 6454 struct ieee80211_sta * 6455 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6456 const u8 *addr, 6457 const u8 *localaddr, 6458 unsigned int *link_id); 6459 6460 /** 6461 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 6462 * @hw: the hardware 6463 * @pubsta: the station 6464 * @block: whether to block or unblock 6465 * 6466 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 6467 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 6468 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 6469 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 6470 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 6471 * 6472 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 6473 * manner. 6474 * 6475 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 6476 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 6477 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 6478 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 6479 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 6480 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 6481 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 6482 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 6483 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 6484 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 6485 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 6486 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 6487 * woke up while blocked or not. 6488 */ 6489 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6490 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 6491 6492 /** 6493 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 6494 * @pubsta: the station 6495 * 6496 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 6497 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 6498 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 6499 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 6500 * 6501 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 6502 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 6503 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 6504 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 6505 * 6506 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 6507 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 6508 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 6509 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 6510 */ 6511 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6512 6513 /** 6514 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 6515 * @pubsta: the station 6516 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 6517 * 6518 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 6519 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 6520 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 6521 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 6522 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 6523 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 6524 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 6525 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 6526 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 6527 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 6528 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 6529 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 6530 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 6531 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 6532 */ 6533 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 6534 6535 /** 6536 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change 6537 * @pubsta: the station 6538 * 6539 * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in 6540 * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of 6541 * &struct ieee80211_link_sta. 6542 * 6543 * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case 6544 * there is no need to call this function. 6545 */ 6546 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6547 6548 /** 6549 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 6550 * 6551 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call 6552 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 6553 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 6554 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 6555 * 6556 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 6557 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 6558 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 6559 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 6560 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 6561 * attempts. 6562 * 6563 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 6564 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 6565 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 6566 * them to 0. 6567 * 6568 * @pubsta: the station 6569 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 6570 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 6571 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 6572 */ 6573 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6574 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 6575 6576 /** 6577 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 6578 * 6579 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6580 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6581 * 6582 * Return: %true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 6583 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return %false. 6584 */ 6585 bool 6586 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6587 6588 /** 6589 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 6590 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6591 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6592 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6593 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6594 * 6595 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held; can sleep. 6596 * 6597 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6598 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6599 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 6600 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. 6601 * 6602 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 6603 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 6604 * set_key callback. 6605 */ 6606 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6607 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6608 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6609 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6610 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6611 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6612 void *data), 6613 void *iter_data); 6614 6615 /** 6616 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 6617 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6618 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6619 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6620 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6621 * 6622 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6623 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6624 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 6625 * in removal process will be skipped. 6626 * 6627 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 6628 * and thus iter must be atomic. 6629 */ 6630 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6631 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6632 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6633 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6634 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6635 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6636 void *data), 6637 void *iter_data); 6638 6639 /** 6640 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 6641 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6642 * @iter: iterator function 6643 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 6644 * 6645 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 6646 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 6647 * places while calling into the driver. 6648 * 6649 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 6650 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 6651 * removed. 6652 * 6653 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 6654 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 6655 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 6656 * or not. 6657 */ 6658 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 6659 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6660 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6661 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 6662 void *data), 6663 void *iter_data); 6664 6665 /** 6666 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 6667 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6668 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6669 * 6670 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 6671 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 6672 * information. This function must only be called from within the 6673 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 6674 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 6675 * %NULL. 6676 * 6677 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 6678 */ 6679 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6680 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6681 6682 /** 6683 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 6684 * 6685 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6686 * 6687 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 6688 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 6689 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 6690 */ 6691 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6692 6693 /** 6694 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 6695 * 6696 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6697 * 6698 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 6699 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 6700 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 6701 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 6702 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 6703 * 6704 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 6705 * without connection recovery attempts. 6706 */ 6707 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6708 6709 /** 6710 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection 6711 * 6712 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6713 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired 6714 * 6715 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a 6716 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired. 6717 */ 6718 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect); 6719 6720 /** 6721 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 6722 * 6723 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6724 * 6725 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 6726 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 6727 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 6728 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 6729 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 6730 * 6731 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 6732 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 6733 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 6734 * disconnect normally later. 6735 * 6736 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 6737 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 6738 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 6739 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 6740 */ 6741 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6742 6743 /** 6744 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after 6745 * hardware restart 6746 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6747 * 6748 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after 6749 * hardware restart. 6750 */ 6751 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6752 6753 /** 6754 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 6755 * rssi threshold triggered 6756 * 6757 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6758 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 6759 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 6760 * @gfp: context flags 6761 * 6762 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 6763 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 6764 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 6765 */ 6766 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6767 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 6768 s32 rssi_level, 6769 gfp_t gfp); 6770 6771 /** 6772 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 6773 * 6774 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6775 * @gfp: context flags 6776 */ 6777 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 6778 6779 /** 6780 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 6781 * 6782 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6783 * @chanctx_conf: Channel context on which radar is detected. Mandatory to 6784 * pass a valid pointer during MLO. For non-MLO %NULL can be passed 6785 */ 6786 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6787 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf); 6788 6789 /** 6790 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 6791 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6792 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 6793 * @link_id: the link_id on which the switch was done. Ignored if success is 6794 * false. 6795 * 6796 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 6797 * and wake up the suspended queues. 6798 */ 6799 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success, 6800 unsigned int link_id); 6801 6802 /** 6803 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error 6804 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6805 * 6806 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel 6807 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send 6808 * a deauth frame in this case. 6809 */ 6810 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6811 6812 /** 6813 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 6814 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6815 * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0 6816 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 6817 * 6818 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 6819 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 6820 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 6821 */ 6822 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 6823 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 6824 6825 /** 6826 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 6827 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6828 */ 6829 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6830 6831 /** 6832 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 6833 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6834 */ 6835 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6836 6837 /** 6838 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 6839 * 6840 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 6841 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 6842 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 6843 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 6844 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 6845 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 6846 * 6847 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6848 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 6849 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 6850 */ 6851 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 6852 const u8 *addr); 6853 6854 /** 6855 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 6856 * @pubsta: station struct 6857 * @tid: the session's TID 6858 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 6859 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 6860 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 6861 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 6862 * 6863 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 6864 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 6865 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 6866 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 6867 * (Only work correctly if @max_rx_aggregation_subframes <= 64 frames) 6868 */ 6869 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6870 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 6871 u16 received_mpdus); 6872 6873 /** 6874 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 6875 * 6876 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 6877 * buffer. 6878 * 6879 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6880 * @ra: the peer's destination address 6881 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 6882 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 6883 */ 6884 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 6885 6886 /** 6887 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 6888 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6889 * @addr: station mac address 6890 * @tid: the rx tid 6891 */ 6892 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 6893 unsigned int tid); 6894 6895 /** 6896 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 6897 * 6898 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6899 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6900 * reordering. 6901 * 6902 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6903 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 6904 * 6905 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6906 * @addr: station mac address 6907 * @tid: the rx tid 6908 */ 6909 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6910 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6911 { 6912 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6913 return; 6914 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 6915 } 6916 6917 /** 6918 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 6919 * 6920 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6921 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6922 * reordering. 6923 * 6924 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6925 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 6926 * 6927 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6928 * @addr: station mac address 6929 * @tid: the rx tid 6930 */ 6931 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6932 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6933 { 6934 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6935 return; 6936 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 6937 } 6938 6939 /** 6940 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 6941 * 6942 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 6943 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 6944 * 6945 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 6946 * 6947 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6948 * @addr: station mac address 6949 * @tid: the rx tid 6950 */ 6951 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6952 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 6953 6954 /* Rate control API */ 6955 6956 /** 6957 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 6958 * 6959 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 6960 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 6961 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 6962 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 6963 * to be filled in 6964 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 6965 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 6966 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 6967 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 6968 * RTS threshold 6969 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 6970 * if the selected rate supports it 6971 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 6972 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 6973 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 6974 */ 6975 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 6976 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 6977 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 6978 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 6979 struct sk_buff *skb; 6980 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 6981 bool rts, short_preamble; 6982 u32 rate_idx_mask; 6983 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 6984 bool bss; 6985 }; 6986 6987 /** 6988 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 6989 */ 6990 enum rate_control_capabilities { 6991 /** 6992 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 6993 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 6994 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 6995 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 6996 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 6997 */ 6998 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 6999 /** 7000 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER: 7001 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx 7002 */ 7003 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1), 7004 }; 7005 7006 struct rate_control_ops { 7007 unsigned long capa; 7008 const char *name; 7009 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 7010 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv, 7011 struct dentry *debugfsdir); 7012 void (*free)(void *priv); 7013 7014 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 7015 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7016 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 7017 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 7018 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7019 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 7020 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7021 u32 changed); 7022 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 7023 void *priv_sta); 7024 7025 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 7026 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7027 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 7028 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7029 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7030 struct sk_buff *skb); 7031 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7032 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 7033 7034 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 7035 struct dentry *dir); 7036 7037 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 7038 }; 7039 7040 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 7041 enum nl80211_band band, 7042 int index) 7043 { 7044 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 7045 } 7046 7047 static inline s8 7048 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7049 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 7050 { 7051 int i; 7052 7053 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 7054 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 7055 return i; 7056 7057 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 7058 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 7059 7060 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 7061 return 0; 7062 } 7063 7064 static inline 7065 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7066 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 7067 { 7068 unsigned int i; 7069 7070 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 7071 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 7072 return true; 7073 return false; 7074 } 7075 7076 /** 7077 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 7078 * 7079 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 7080 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 7081 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 7082 * the most recent rate control module decision. 7083 * 7084 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7085 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 7086 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 7087 * 7088 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 7089 */ 7090 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7091 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 7092 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 7093 7094 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 7095 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 7096 7097 static inline bool 7098 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7099 { 7100 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 7101 } 7102 7103 static inline bool 7104 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7105 { 7106 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 7107 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 7108 } 7109 7110 static inline bool 7111 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7112 { 7113 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 7114 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 7115 } 7116 7117 static inline bool 7118 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7119 { 7120 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 7121 } 7122 7123 static inline bool 7124 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7125 { 7126 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 7127 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 7128 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 7129 } 7130 7131 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 7132 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 7133 { 7134 if (p2p) { 7135 switch (type) { 7136 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 7137 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 7138 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 7139 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 7140 default: 7141 break; 7142 } 7143 } 7144 return type; 7145 } 7146 7147 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 7148 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7149 { 7150 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 7151 } 7152 7153 /** 7154 * ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif - return HE capabilities for sband/vif 7155 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 7156 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7157 * 7158 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap, or %NULL is none found 7159 */ 7160 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap * 7161 ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7162 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7163 { 7164 return ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7165 } 7166 7167 /** 7168 * ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif - return HE 6 GHz capabilities 7169 * @sband: the sband to search for the STA on 7170 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7171 * 7172 * Return: the 6GHz capabilities 7173 */ 7174 static inline __le16 7175 ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7176 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7177 { 7178 return ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7179 } 7180 7181 /** 7182 * ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif - return ETH capabilities for sband/vif 7183 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 7184 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7185 * 7186 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap, or %NULL is none found 7187 */ 7188 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap * 7189 ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7190 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7191 { 7192 return ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7193 } 7194 7195 /** 7196 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 7197 * 7198 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 7199 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0 7200 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 7201 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 7202 * 7203 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 7204 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 7205 * matching GroupId management frame. 7206 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 7207 */ 7208 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 7209 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 7210 7211 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7212 int rssi_min_thold, 7213 int rssi_max_thold); 7214 7215 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7216 7217 /** 7218 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 7219 * 7220 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 7221 * 7222 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 7223 * 7224 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 7225 * applicable. 7226 */ 7227 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7228 7229 /** 7230 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 7231 * @vif: virtual interface 7232 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 7233 * @gfp: allocation flags 7234 * 7235 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 7236 */ 7237 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7238 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 7239 gfp_t gfp); 7240 7241 /** 7242 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 7243 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7244 * @vif: virtual interface 7245 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 7246 * @band: the band to transmit on 7247 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 7248 * 7249 * Return: %true if the skb was prepared, %false otherwise 7250 * 7251 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 7252 */ 7253 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7254 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 7255 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 7256 7257 /** 7258 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header 7259 * of injected frames. 7260 * 7261 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields, 7262 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure 7263 * of the skb before calling this function. 7264 * 7265 * @skb: packet injected by userspace 7266 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 7267 * 7268 * Return: %true if the radiotap header was parsed, %false otherwise 7269 */ 7270 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb, 7271 struct net_device *dev); 7272 7273 /** 7274 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 7275 * 7276 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 7277 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 7278 * 7279 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 7280 * 7281 * private: 7282 * 7283 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 7284 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 7285 */ 7286 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 7287 u32 next_tsf; 7288 bool has_next_tsf; 7289 7290 u8 absent; 7291 7292 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 7293 struct { 7294 u32 start; 7295 u32 duration; 7296 u32 interval; 7297 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 7298 }; 7299 7300 /** 7301 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 7302 * 7303 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 7304 * @data: NoA tracking data 7305 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 7306 * 7307 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 7308 */ 7309 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 7310 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 7311 7312 /** 7313 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 7314 * 7315 * @data: NoA tracking data 7316 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 7317 */ 7318 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 7319 7320 /** 7321 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 7322 * @vif: virtual interface 7323 * @peer: the peer's destination address 7324 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 7325 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 7326 * @gfp: allocation flags 7327 * 7328 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 7329 */ 7330 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 7331 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 7332 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 7333 7334 /** 7335 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 7336 * 7337 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 7338 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 7339 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 7340 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 7341 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 7342 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 7343 * 7344 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 7345 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 7346 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7347 * 7348 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 7349 * @tid: the TID to reserve 7350 * 7351 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 7352 */ 7353 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7354 7355 /** 7356 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 7357 * 7358 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 7359 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 7360 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 7361 * 7362 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 7363 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 7364 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7365 * 7366 * @sta: the station 7367 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 7368 */ 7369 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7370 7371 /** 7372 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7373 * 7374 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7375 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7376 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7377 * 7378 * Return: the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 7379 * 7380 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 7381 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 7382 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the 7383 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 7384 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 7385 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 7386 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 7387 * 7388 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 7389 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 7390 */ 7391 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7392 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7393 7394 /** 7395 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7396 * (in process context) 7397 * 7398 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 7399 * (internally disables bottom halves). 7400 * 7401 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7402 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7403 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7404 * 7405 * Return: the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 7406 */ 7407 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7408 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7409 { 7410 struct sk_buff *skb; 7411 7412 local_bh_disable(); 7413 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 7414 local_bh_enable(); 7415 7416 return skb; 7417 } 7418 7419 /** 7420 * ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue - mac80211 handler for wake_tx_queue callback 7421 * 7422 * @hw: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7423 * @txq: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7424 * 7425 * Drivers can use this function for the mandatory mac80211 wake_tx_queue 7426 * callback in struct ieee80211_ops. They should not call this function. 7427 */ 7428 void ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7429 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7430 7431 /** 7432 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 7433 * 7434 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7435 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 7436 * 7437 * Return: the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 7438 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 7439 * driver has finished scheduling it. 7440 */ 7441 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7442 7443 /** 7444 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 7445 * 7446 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7447 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 7448 * 7449 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 7450 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 7451 */ 7452 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7453 7454 /* (deprecated) */ 7455 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 7456 { 7457 } 7458 7459 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7460 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 7461 7462 /** 7463 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 7464 * 7465 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7466 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7467 * 7468 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 7469 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 7470 * 7471 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 7472 * this TXQ internally. 7473 */ 7474 static inline void 7475 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7476 { 7477 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 7478 } 7479 7480 /** 7481 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 7482 * 7483 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7484 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7485 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 7486 * 7487 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 7488 * internally. 7489 */ 7490 static inline void 7491 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7492 bool force) 7493 { 7494 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 7495 } 7496 7497 /** 7498 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 7499 * 7500 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 7501 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 7502 * fairness accounting without using the scheduling order enforced by 7503 * next_txq(). 7504 * 7505 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 7506 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 7507 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 7508 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 7509 * again. 7510 * 7511 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 7512 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 7513 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 7514 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 7515 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 7516 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 7517 * 7518 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7519 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7520 * 7521 * Return: %true if transmission is allowed, %false otherwise 7522 */ 7523 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7524 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7525 7526 /** 7527 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 7528 * 7529 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 7530 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 7531 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 7532 * 7533 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7534 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 7535 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 7536 */ 7537 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7538 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 7539 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 7540 7541 /** 7542 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 7543 * 7544 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 7545 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7546 * 7547 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7548 * @inst_id: the local instance id 7549 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 7550 * @gfp: allocation flags 7551 */ 7552 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7553 u8 inst_id, 7554 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 7555 gfp_t gfp); 7556 7557 /** 7558 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 7559 * 7560 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 7561 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 7562 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7563 * 7564 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7565 * @match: match event information 7566 * @gfp: allocation flags 7567 */ 7568 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7569 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 7570 gfp_t gfp); 7571 7572 /** 7573 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 7574 * 7575 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7576 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 7577 * 7578 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7579 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 7580 * information. 7581 * @len: frame length in bytes 7582 * 7583 * Return: the airtime estimate 7584 */ 7585 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7586 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 7587 int len); 7588 7589 /** 7590 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 7591 * 7592 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7593 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 7594 * 7595 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7596 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 7597 * @len: frame length in bytes 7598 * 7599 * Return: the airtime estimate 7600 */ 7601 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7602 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 7603 int len); 7604 /** 7605 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template. 7606 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7607 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7608 * 7609 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7610 * 7611 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error. 7612 */ 7613 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7614 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7615 7616 /** 7617 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast 7618 * probe response template. 7619 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7620 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7621 * 7622 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7623 * 7624 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error. 7625 */ 7626 struct sk_buff * 7627 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7628 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7629 7630 /** 7631 * ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color 7632 * collision. 7633 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 7634 * 7635 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7636 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is 7637 * aware of. 7638 */ 7639 void 7640 ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7641 u64 color_bitmap, u8 link_id); 7642 7643 /** 7644 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame 7645 * 7646 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with 7647 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames. 7648 * 7649 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 7650 * 7651 * Return: %true if @skb is a data frame, %false otherwise 7652 */ 7653 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb) 7654 { 7655 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb); 7656 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data; 7657 7658 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP || 7659 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control); 7660 } 7661 7662 /** 7663 * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode 7664 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7665 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7666 * 7667 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held; may sleep; calls 7668 * back into the driver. 7669 * 7670 * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface 7671 * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active), 7672 * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links. 7673 * 7674 * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same 7675 * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get 7676 * a sequence of calls like 7677 * 7678 * - change_vif_links(0x11) 7679 * - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0) 7680 * - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4) 7681 * - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP) 7682 * (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down) 7683 * - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0) 7684 * - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4) 7685 * - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP) 7686 * - change_vif_links(0x10) 7687 * 7688 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 7689 */ 7690 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links); 7691 7692 /** 7693 * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links 7694 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7695 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7696 * 7697 * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only 7698 * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and 7699 * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be 7700 * completed after it returns. 7701 */ 7702 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7703 u16 active_links); 7704 7705 /** 7706 * ieee80211_send_teardown_neg_ttlm - tear down a negotiated TTLM request 7707 * @vif: the interface on which the tear down request should be sent. 7708 * 7709 * This function can be used to tear down a previously accepted negotiated 7710 * TTLM request. 7711 */ 7712 void ieee80211_send_teardown_neg_ttlm(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7713 7714 /** 7715 * ieee80211_chan_width_to_rx_bw - convert channel width to STA RX bandwidth 7716 * @width: the channel width value to convert 7717 * Return: the STA RX bandwidth value for the channel width 7718 */ 7719 static inline enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth 7720 ieee80211_chan_width_to_rx_bw(enum nl80211_chan_width width) 7721 { 7722 switch (width) { 7723 default: 7724 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 7725 fallthrough; 7726 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT: 7727 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20: 7728 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20; 7729 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40: 7730 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40; 7731 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_80: 7732 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80; 7733 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_160: 7734 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_80P80: 7735 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160; 7736 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_320: 7737 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320; 7738 } 7739 } 7740 7741 /* for older drivers - let's not document these ... */ 7742 int ieee80211_emulate_add_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7743 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 7744 void ieee80211_emulate_remove_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7745 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 7746 void ieee80211_emulate_change_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7747 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 7748 u32 changed); 7749 int ieee80211_emulate_switch_vif_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7750 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 7751 int n_vifs, 7752 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 7753 7754 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 7755